JP7197807B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine having performance accessories.

Conventionally, in various pachinko gaming machines, display effects such as advance notice effects displayed on the effect display device, effect actions and light emission effects of the effect accessories, etc. By using it, the amusement of the game and production is enhanced (see Patent Document 1, for example).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-149364

While gaming machines with various specifications have been developed, there has been a need for motion control and performance actions of performance roles that are highly interesting to players and allow suitable performances.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine equipped with a performance accessory that performs appropriate action control to enhance interest.

Main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, production control means (production control CPU) that controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and production controlled by the production control means Equipment (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), effect display means (effect display device P80) included in the effect device and performing a predetermined effect display, and effect display device P80 included in the effect device , a game machine having a production movable body (lower role object P680) capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation, and a production light emitting unit provided in the production movable body and executing a predetermined light emission production, wherein the main control The means executes a win-or-fail lottery as to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is established based on the progress of the game, and the effect control means executes the win-or-fail lottery result. It is possible to select an execution pattern from a plurality of types of production patterns including a specific production pattern as the execution pattern of the production related to, and the specific production pattern is a first production period (for example, normal reach) and a second production period after the first production period. It is a production pattern having a production period (for example, SP reach), and in the first production period, by switching the light emission mode of the production light emitting unit multiple times, the first production period light emission production (back Button step-up effect) can be executed, and the suggestion related to the result of the winning lottery in the first effect period light effect is suggested step by step by the difference in color in the light emission mode of the effect light emitting unit . When the light emitting effect is executed during one effect period, the effect light emitting part is turned on until a predetermined timing during the execution of the second effect period (for example, until the win-lose branch effect during SP reach or until the chance up effect occurs). 1 staging period is characterized by a lighting mode related to the final lighting mode of the lighting staging, and the second staging period is a ready-to-win staging that suggests that a special game is executed as a result of a predetermined staging. During the ready-to-win performance, a plurality of ready-to-reach advance notice performances suggesting the degree of expectation for execution of the special game can be executed, and the final lighting mode of the first performance period light-emitting performance is a plurality of ready-to-win performances. Continue until the timing of the advance notice effect during the predetermined reach of the advance notice effect, and before the timing of the advance notice effect during the predetermined reach during the second effect period, the final light emission mode of the light emission effect during the first effect period by the effect light emitting unit. is a luminescence mode of a different color, and the luminescence mode of the luminescence effect of the first effect period is higher than the final luminescence mode of the luminescence effect of the first effect period. As a result, the result of the win-or-fail lottery is the result that the special game will be executed.In the case where a specific notice is executed that emits light in a predetermined light emission mode, which is a color that suggests that the degree of expectation is high, a predetermined reach is performed. Before the middle notice performance timing, the final light emission mode of the first performance period light emission performance in the performance light emitting part is switched to a predetermined light emission mode, and the final light emission of the first performance period light emission performance is performed even after the end of the specific notice. When the mode is not returned and the specific notice is not executed, the light emission in the final light emission mode of the light emission effect during the first effect period can be executed until the timing of the predetermined advance notice effect during the reach during the second effect period. machine.

Any combination of the constituent elements according to the above invention, and the constituent elements and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced among methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. Configurations according to the embodiments and modifications described in the detailed description are also effective as aspects of the present invention.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a performance accessory that performs appropriate action control to increase interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a perspective view in the front direction of the pachinko game machine with the frame member opened. It is the perspective view of the back direction of the state which opened the frame member of the said pachinko game machine. It is a perspective view showing a game board attached to the pachinko game machine assumed. It is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the transition of the game state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the power-on processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a figure which shows the game stop state setting process during the said power-on process. It is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a figure which shows the success-or-failure lottery table of the pachinko game machine which is assumed. It is a diagram showing a winning symbol lottery table of the premise pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during the low base state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during the high base state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a special variation pattern lottery table that is referred to during a limited period of the pachinko gaming machine that is assumed. It is a diagram showing the power-on processing of the effect control board of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing an interrupt process of the effect control board of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a game effect of symbol variation display (decorative symbol stop display) during normal game (low probability/low base) of the premised pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing the game production|presentation of the situation where the ready-to-win production|presentation with high expectation which becomes a big hit of the premise pachinko game machine is performed. It is a diagram showing a game effect in a state in which a jackpot game is being executed in the pachinko gaming machine as a premise. It is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function, which is a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base) of the premised pachinko game machine. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a front view of the center decoration unit of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation|movement of the upper role of the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation|movement of the side role of the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation|movement of the lower role of the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation|movement (2nd pattern) of the upper role of the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a figure which shows operation|movement of the production|presentation operation means of the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a figure which shows the processing of the initialization and return operation processing of the presentation movable accessory of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the processing of the initial position return operation processing of the production|presentation movable accessory of the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a figure which shows the process of the initial operation confirmation process of the presentation movable accessory of the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state of the pachinko game machine of a present Example, and an effect|presentation state. It is a diagram showing the types of special games of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the kind of variation pattern of the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is an effect time chart diagram at the time of A reach (loss, small hit) of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is an effect time chart diagram at the time of A reach (jackpot) of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is an effect time chart diagram at the time of B reach (jackpot) of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the timing (A) in the production|presentation time chart at the time of B reach (jackpot) of the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the timing (B) in the production|presentation time chart at the time of B reach (jackpot) of the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is an example of the effect screen of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect|presentation display of the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is an image diagram showing a display mode (at the beginning of the production) of the battle production A using the production button operation in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment. It is an image diagram showing a display mode of the battle production A using the production button operation in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment (deployment when the operation of the production button is inappropriate). It is an image diagram showing the display mode of the battle production A using the production button operation in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment (deployment when the operation of the production button is appropriate). It is an image diagram showing a display mode (end of production) of the battle production A using the production button operation in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, and a diagram showing a modification. Fig. 1 is an image diagram 1 of a display mode of a battle effect B using the effect button operation in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment. It is image figure 2 of the display mode of the battle production|presentation B using production|presentation button operation in the pachinko game machine of 2nd Example. FIG. 3 is an image diagram 3 of a display mode of a battle effect B using the effect button operation in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 4 is an image diagram 4 of a display mode of a battle effect B using the effect button operation in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment. It is an image diagram showing a display mode of the effect mode selection effect in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is an image diagram showing a display mode when the left side of the cross key is operated in the presentation mode selection presentation in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment; In the production mode selection production in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, it is an image diagram showing a display mode when the right of the cross key is operated.

(Prerequisite technology)
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "prerequisite technology") on which the present invention is based will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 and 3 show a pachinko game machine as a representative example of the pachinko game machine according to the base technology, and FIG. 4 shows a game board provided in this pachinko game machine. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine will be explained. In the following description, for convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 are referred to as the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction.

[Machine configuration of pachinko machine]
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine P is configured in a rectangular outer shell, and is configured in a rectangular shape with a size matching the opening of the outer frame P1 in front of the opening of the outer frame P1 fixed in the game facility. The front frame P2 is mounted so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached by means of upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20) disposed on the front left edges of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are detachably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a square shape, and is assembled and held on the front side of the front frame P2 so as to be able to open, close, and detach from the front using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20). The game board P5 is detachably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and configured so that the player can visually recognize a game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 which is closed and held. It is In addition, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 can be rotated in either the left or right direction by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko game machine P, depending on the direction of rotation. , the locking of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 is released, or the locking of the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 is released. As a specific example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the right, the locking of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 is released, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the left. By doing so, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

Under the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball trays P340 (upper ball tray P341 and lower ball tray P342) for storing game balls are provided. In addition, the glass frame P3 is provided with a production lamp P350 that emits light according to the progress of the game, and a speaker P370 that can output sounds such as sound effects according to the development of the game. An effect operation unit P380 for performing a predetermined effect operation is attached to the lower center of the glass frame P3. The button P381 allows the player to operate at all times, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable accessory P360) provided on the glass frame, and the operation means itself. is displaced to an upward projecting state (input permission state), operation input is possible (a plurality of operations are possible with one effect operation means).

A handle P204 is provided at the lower right portion of the front frame P2 for controlling the shooting operation of the game ball and the shooting intensity. A shooting device unit P240 is further provided at the lower part of the front frame P2, and although illustration is omitted, a ball feeding mechanism P241 that feeds game balls stored in the upper ball tray P341 one by one, and the ball feeding mechanism P241 feeds out the game balls. A launching device P242 having a launching mechanism (ball-hitting mallet driven by a rotary solenoid) that launches a game ball toward the game area P501, a launch control board P243 that synchronously controls the operations of the ball feeding mechanism P241 and the launching device P242, etc. is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is configured with a base material formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using transparent synthetic resin or wood. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine P including the game board P5, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board unit P5. FIG. 4 shows a state in which the production accessory P560 (also called "movable production device", "movable production body", "movable production accessory", etc.) provided in the game board unit is in operation. On the front surface of the game board P5, an arc-shaped outer rail P502 is arranged from the lower left to the upper right, and a circle is arranged from the lower left to the upper left inside the outer rail P502 from near the lower center of the game board. An arc-shaped inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504 formed in a curved shape that is arranged between the end of the upper right outer rail P502 and the lower part of the board surface and opens leftward, and the outer rail P502 A substantially circular game area P501 is defined inside surrounded by the inner rail P503 and the rail decoration P504. The game area P501 is divided into a left area P501L (left-handed area), which is an area on the left side of the center role P540, and an area on the right side of the center role P540, which is disposed substantially in the center. and a right area P501R (right hitting area). Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and a windmill P511 (not shown), there are a first start winning opening P711 (first starting opening), a second starting winning opening P721 (second starting opening), a general winning opening P731, Various ball entry devices (referred to as "winning devices" when prize balls are generated) such as a normal pattern operation port P741 (normal pattern operation gate device), a large winning prize port P751 (attacker), etc. are provided. It should be noted that the number of the big prize winning opening may be one, or it may be configured to have a plurality of openings. Further, in this specification, due to the structure of the ball-entering device, the game ball is ejected after entering the ball-entering device, or further flows down the game area P501 after entering the ball-entering device (gate type). On the other hand, when a game ball is detected by an internal detection switch, it is called "entering ball" or "winning (especially when a prize ball is generated)", and flows down to the downstream game area like a gate type ball entrance. There are cases where it is described separately from "passing" in particular. Also, the ball entry device is sometimes referred to as a ball entry port, and the prize winning device is sometimes referred to as a prize winning port.

In addition, at the lower right of the game area P501, the main control display device P50 which is lighting controlled by the main control board described later, such as the first special symbol display device P51, the second special symbol display device P52, the normal symbol display device P53, etc. are centrally located. A center accessory P540 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the effect display device P80 is provided so as to be visible through the opening of the center accessory P540. Above the center accessory P540, etc., there is provided a production accessory P560 (movable accessory device) that performs a production operation according to the development of the game. At the lower end of the game area P501, an out port P790 is provided through which a game ball that has flowed down without entering the winning port of various ball entry devices can pass. A game ball that has entered a prize winning opening of various prize winning devices or a game ball that has flowed into the outlet P790 flows down to the rear side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed through the game board P5 from front to back. Then, it is collected in the collection channel (played ball passage) at the bottom of the front frame P2 and passes through the out ball sensor P792 (shot ball number sensor) provided at the bottom of the front frame for detecting the total number of shot game balls. After that, it is discharged out of the game machine.

The first starting winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. This first start winning device P710 is provided with a first start winning opening P711 into which a game ball can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711 is a trigger for acquiring the random number used for the lottery related to the first special symbol, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening P711. A lottery related to the first special symbol is executed after the timing immediately after entering the ball or after the holding period has passed.

The second starting winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. This second start prize winning device P720 has a second start prize winning port P721 into which a game ball can enter, and a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second start prize winning port P721 when winning a normal symbol lottery to be described later. A normal electric accessory P770, which is a switching movable body, is provided. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721 is the trigger of the random number used for the lottery related to the second special symbol, and based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening P721. A lottery relating to the second special symbol is executed at the timing immediately after entering the ball or after the holding period has passed. The second start winning device P721 has an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered into the second start winning port P721 by the action of a normal electric accessory P770, and a game ball enters the second starting winning port P721. It changes to a closed state that is impossible or difficult to enter. In other words, the second starting winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning port unless it is displaced to the open state, and a predetermined opportunity described later (a chance to win the normal symbol lottery) When it becomes an open state at , the ease of entering a game ball increases. In addition, the structure of the normal electric accessory P770 is known in various forms, and there are cases where it is not a structure that changes the ease of entering a ball by opening the movable body P771. ” may be expressed as “easy-entering state (easy-entering mode)” and “difficult-entering state (difficult-entering state)” respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left general winning device P730L arranged in the left hitting area P501L and a right general winning device P730R arranged in the right hitting area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P according to the underlying technology, the left general prize winning device P730L is configured as one unit with three general prize winning ports P731La to P731Lc, while the right general prize winning device P730R is a large prize winning device P750 described later. configured as part of Entry of a game ball into the general winning hole P731 triggers the payout of prize balls as with other winning devices. It should be noted that the number and positions of the general winning openings P731 of the pachinko game machine, which are assumed, are merely an example, and may be configured to be arranged only in the right-handed area P501R.

The normal pattern operation gate device P740 (normal pattern operation port) is provided as a starting entrance ball corresponding to the normal pattern game. This normal figure operation gate device P740 is provided with an operation gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entered game ball is configured to be able to further flow downstream of the game area of the game board. The passage of the game ball to the operating gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting prize winning device P720, that is, whether or not to operate the normal electric accessory P770. . It should be noted that, as a modification, it is also possible to configure the above-described general winning port P731 to have a function that triggers the normal symbol lottery. It is also possible to provide the function of generating as one winning device (normal drawing operation winning port).

The big winning device P750 has a big winning opening P751 (special electric role P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery results in a big win or a small win. and is sometimes referred to as an “attacker (device)”. The big winning device P750 has an open state in which a game ball can enter the big winning opening P751 or is easy to enter (for example, a state in which a special electric accessory is activated P755), and a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening P751. Or it changes to a closed state where it is difficult to enter (for example, the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the jackpot game, a plurality of round games (unit games) accompanied by opening and closing operations of the jackpot P751 are performed. Even when the special electric accessory P755 is activated, a series of activation patterns (also called "open pattern") may cause the movable body P756 that constitutes the big winning opening P751 to be in a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. have

In addition, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the big winning device P750 may have a specific area P760 (referred to as "V zone" or "V area" through which game balls can pass). (referred to as "area", "continuation area", etc.) may be provided. As a function related to this "specific area", (a) activating the probability fluctuation function (described later) after the big win game triggered by passing through the specific area during the big win game, (b) passing the specific area during the small win game to activate the accessory continuous operation device (flag for continuously operating the special electric accessory) and grant the right to execute the jackpot game, (c) specified in a specific round during the jackpot game Examples include deterministic or non-execution of subsequent rounds based on whether or not a region has been passed. In addition, an opening/closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided for the "specific area". It may be configured to pass through the specific region P760 or other non-specific regions. Also, during the big hit game or the small hit game, it may have a period during which the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 is valid and a period during which it is invalid.

Incidentally, in the pachinko gaming machine P as a premise, the big winning device P750 is provided in the right region P501R (right-handed region) in the game region P501. Therefore, in the big-hit game or the small-hit game, when the game ball is shot toward the game area P501, it is easy to enter the big winning hole P751 by hitting the right side area P501R, that is, hitting the right side. It's becoming

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, will be described. On the rear side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 having a front-to-rear communicating window is mounted for mounting the game board unit P5 in the center. The reverse set unit P4 includes a storage tank P401 for storing a large number of game balls supplied from the gaming facility side, a gutter member P402 for flowing down the game balls from the storage tank P401, and a game ball guided by the gutter member. A prize ball payout unit P410 to be put out, a back side passage member P403 for causing the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 to flow down to the upper ball tray P341 or the lower ball tray P342, and the like are provided. In addition, on the game ball flow down path from the storage tank P401 to the ball tray P340, there is a ball removal mechanism (ball removal operation lever P405, a valve member that forms a flow path that ejects the game ball from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever. P406) is provided.

On the back side of the game board P5, there are a main control board P40 for comprehensively controlling the game progress of the pachinko game machine P, and an effect control board for controlling overall effects according to the game progress accompanying the control of the main control board P40. An image control board P41 and an image control board P42 for controlling image display according to game development are attached. Note that, in the pachinko game machine P of the underlying technology, the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 form an effect display unit in an assembled state integrated with the effect display device P80 (liquid crystal display device). On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there are a payout control board P43 for controlling the payout of game balls, and a power supply for receiving power from the game facility side and supplying power to various control boards and electric/electronic parts. A substrate P44 (not shown) and the like are attached. In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a board case made of transparent resin having a caulking structure and a sealing structure. , respectively. These control boards and the electric/electronic parts of each part of the pachinko game machine are interconnected via harnesses (connector cables) to enable the progress of games and the execution of effects in the pachinko game machine P. .

[Function block]
FIG. 5 shows functional blocks of a pachinko game machine as a premise.

The pachinko game machine includes a power supply board P44 that generates power to be used in the game machine based on AC power supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control board P40 (main control CPU ), a payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device for controlling payout of prize balls and shooting of game balls, and a performance control board P41 for controlling performance operations and processes. It is constructed in the form of In addition, the arrows shown in the figure indicate upper transmission/reception relationships by solid-line arrows and electrical connection relationships by broken-line arrows.

By operating a power switch P47 provided on the board, the power board P44 is connected to a main control board P40, a performance control board P41, a payout control board P43, and various game devices electrically connected to them. On the other hand, it generates and supplies the power required for operation. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the settings of the gaming machine, the power switch is covered with an opening/closing cover to prevent unauthorized operation. protected in good condition.

The main control board P40 includes a first start winning opening P711 (special figure 1 starting opening switch P712), a second starting winning opening P721 (special figure 2 starting opening switch P722), a large winning opening P751 (large winning opening switch P752), Various detection switches related to game progress such as normal pattern operation port P741 (normal pattern operation port switch P742) and other detection switches general winning port P731 (left side general winning port, right side general winning port), out port P790 It is also connected to switches and sensors such as the setting key switch P49, the vibration detection sensor P72, and the magnet sensor P73, which are used for managing various games and monitoring fraud. The main control board receives input of information related to the occurrence of various game states from these switches, determines control details related to the progress of the game, and is composed of solenoids, etc. A special electric accessory driving means P70 driven to expand the winning opening P751, and a normal electric accessory driven to make the normal electric accessory P770 easy to enter when winning the normal symbol lottery. Information relating to the driving mode is output to a game device such as the driving means P71.

Sensors and the like connected to the main control board P40 are connected to terminals called input ports on the main control board and notify the main control board P40 of the presence or absence of occurrence of various game states based on sensor detection as information, special electric Accessory drive means P70, normal electric accessory drive means P71, and other information output from a terminal called an output port, such as a launch permission signal for the launcher P242, is received to control each device.

In addition, the main control board P40 includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 that perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a round indicator light P54 that notifies the type (number of rounds) of the big hit and the small hit, and the game state. A main control display device P50 that performs various displays such as a status indicator P55 that notifies the and so on. Regarding the "base value", there are various other calculation methods such as data that excludes the winning of the starting prize opening P711, etc. Details are omitted in the explanation of the pachinko game machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to devices outside the gaming machine through an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, and the like, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the effect control board P41 and the payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the gaming machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device P410 based on signals indicating the payout of prize balls and the control state of the main control board transmitted from the main control board P40. In response to the operation of , control relating to shooting of the game ball by the shooting device unit P240 is performed. The payout device P410 has, for example, a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by the rotation of the payout motor P411. The launching device (shooting device unit) P240 moves the game balls staying in the ball tray P340 (upper ball tray P341) one by one to the position where they can be shot by the ball feeding unit P241, and then hits the game ball with the hitting mallet. It is configured to shoot a game ball by hitting it. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48, which is mainly used for initializing the game machine and canceling errors that occur during the game. Operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness and connector used.

The production control board P41 includes the production display device P80, the drive source and position detection sensor (for example, drive motor, initial position detection sensor, production position detection sensor) of the production movable accessory P560, the speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production operation unit P380 (for example, production button P381 which is production operation means P81, production lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), production lamp P82 (“decorative lamp”, “board lamp (P550)”, “frame lamp (P350) ”), and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. Also, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 are connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) or the like that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays an image such as a liquid crystal display device). It may be something to do. In addition, in the pachinko game machine on which this assumption is made, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the performance control board P41. may be configured to control

Transmission and reception of data between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41 is performed by unidirectional data transmission/reception so as to be in one direction from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the effect control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40. , it is not possible to request data transmission. Therefore, the effect control board P41 cannot refer to the information unless the information generated by the main control board P40 is transmitted. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P assumed here, data transmission and reception are performed bidirectionally between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as in the case between the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41, it may be configured to transmit and receive data in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progression]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko game machine P as the underlying technology configured as described above will be described for each game state. The "game state" is roughly divided into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which game balls are easier to obtain than in the normal game state. The "normal game state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to transition to the "special game state". A plurality of states are provided, and among the plurality of normal game states, the state in which it is relatively easy for the player to acquire the right to transition to the special game state (which is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state (low probability/low base state)) State) is expressed as "specific game state". The ``special game state'' corresponds to so-called ``big win game'' and ``small win game'', and the main control board P40 drives the special electric accessory drive means P70 to open the big winning opening P751, and the game ball is acquired. It means a state in which it is easy to

[Normal game state (low probability / low base state)]
First, the game method and the progress of the game in the normal game state will be explained. It should be noted that the normal game state described here is a description of the "normal game state (low probability / low base state)" (see FIG. 6) excluding the specific game state, and generally in the situation where the player starts the game The game state will be explained, and the game method, the progress of the game, and the meanings of the terms "low (high) probability" and "low (high) base" in the specific game state will be described later.

As a game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), first, the player operates the handle P204 to shoot a game ball toward the game area P501 provided on the game board P5. In the premised pachinko game machine P, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player controls the operation amount of the handle P204 so that the game ball shoots toward the left area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area. The game is played by operating so that the

When a game ball is shot to the left area P501L of the game area by the player, the shot game ball flows down the game area P501 and hits a game nail P510 (also called "obstacle nail" or "nail") (not shown) or , While displacing the flow direction by the windmill P511, the first start winning opening P711 arranged at the substantially lower center position in the game area P501 of the game board called "navel" etc., or the general winning opening P731L of the left general winning device The ball enters (wins a prize), or enters an out hole P790 as a game ball that has been played without entering any of the winning holes. When the ball enters the first start winning hole P711 or the general winning hole P731, the main control board P40 sends information (control command ) is output, and the player acquires new game balls by paying out prize balls.

Here, a special figure 1 start opening switch P712 is arranged inside the first start winning opening P711. , When the ball is entered into the first start winning opening P711, the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start port switch P712, in addition to paying out a predetermined number of game balls, the lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is performed. Get a random value to do. Acquisition of the random number is based on the detection of the game ball, the acquisition of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit on the electric circuit (hard latch), or the control device of the main control board P40 by software processing. There are methods such as executing processing to obtain random numbers from the random number generation circuit when detecting information on game balls, or obtaining updated random numbers in software (soft latch). It is possible to use them properly according to the random number value to be obtained, or to use them in combination. It should be noted that when the ball enters the general winning slot, the random number related to the special symbol is not acquired, and only the prize ball is paid out.

A lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win/fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "fluctuation pattern lottery". The "win/fail lottery" is a process of determining whether the lottery result using the obtained random number value is a "big hit" or a "loss" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result may include a "minor win"). ). The "hit symbol lottery" (sometimes simply referred to as "symbol lottery") is a process of determining the display pattern of the stop display symbol indicating the winning or failing lottery result in the special symbol display device P51 (P52) of the main control display device P50. It is possible to determine one pattern from a plurality of stop display patterns for one lottery result (big win, small win), and "big win" or "minor win" according to the stop display pattern determined here. It is possible to make the execution mode of the special game in . "Variation pattern lottery" is a process for determining at what timing the stop display pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery is to be displayed in the special pattern display device P51 (P52), and the special pattern in the special pattern display device P51 (P52). It determines the time (referred to as "variation display time" and "variation pattern") during which variable display indicating that the lottery has been executed is performed. It is common to use different random numbers for the "win/fail lottery", "win pattern lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery". called "random number". In addition, the lottery related to the control of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the detection of the game ball of the special figure 2 starting port switch P722, is also the same "special symbol lottery". Also, the explanation of the "special symbol lottery" will be given later.

Returning to the description of the game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots a game ball into the left area P501L of the game area. Then, the game ball is entered into the first start winning hole P711, the lottery (special symbol lottery) relating to the first special symbol is executed, and the special symbol indicating "big win" ("small win") on the special symbol display device. is displayed, a game aiming at acquiring the execution right of the special game is performed.

In the process of the player receiving the special symbol lottery, the variable display of the special symbols is performed according to the time determined by the variation pattern lottery. During this special pattern variable display period, when there is a new start winning hole (first start winning hole P711, second start winning hole P721), a special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. It has a hold function that temporarily stores random numbers corresponding to rights. In the premised pachinko game machine P, as a holding function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start winning hole P711, it is possible to suspend the special symbol lottery up to four times. It should be noted that the holding function can be set for each special symbol, and in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, apart from the holding of the first special symbol, the holding function of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol can be set up to four times. It is possible to reserve the random number used for the special symbol lottery.

In this way, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots the game ball to the left area P501L of the game area and executes the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol. Then, in the special symbol lottery, when the lottery result of the special game state such as "big win" or "minor win" is won, and the fact that the right to shift to the special game state is acquired is displayed on the special symbol display device. , the game state of the pachinko game machine P shifts to a special game state.

[Special game state]
Next, the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state will be explained. The special game state includes "big win (game)" and "minor win (game)". , and the big winning hole P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The big difference is that the "small hit" is completed by the operation of the special electric role product once, as opposed to being based on the operation of the operating device. Another difference is that in the operation of the special electric role product (jackpot) based on the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, it is possible to make the operation mode more advantageous to the player regarding the operation of the special electric role product P755. Specifically, the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the operating state (big win) of the role product continuous operating device is allowed up to 30 seconds, while the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the small winning is allowed. There is a point that the time is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following description of the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state, the jackpot will be described as an example.

The game progress of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the underlying technology, is chronologically called a "special game start demo" (in the case of a big win, it is called a "jackpot start demo", a "role combination operation start demo", etc.). In the case of a hit, a performance period called "small win start demo") to inform the player that various special games have been won, and a single time called "round (game)" (also referred to as "unit game") The operation period of the special electric accessory P755 and the “special game end demo” (in the case of a big win, it is called “big win end demo”, “role combination operation end demo”, etc., and in the case of a small win, it is called “small win end demo” ), which is mainly composed of the game results (such as the number of acquired game balls) during the special game and the period for performing notification related to the type of the normal game state (including the specific game state) of the transition destination.

Next, the game method during each special game period described above will be described. First, during the “special game start demo” period, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, the big winning opening P751 is arranged in the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and the normal game state (low probability/low Even if a game ball is shot into the left area P501L similar to the base state), it is almost impossible to expect the ball to enter the big winning hole P751, so the big winning hole P751 in the special game is in an easy-to-enter state Before the start of the round game In addition, a right-handed notification effect that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area is provided by the production display device P80, speakers (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and production lamps. Execute using P82. The player adjusts the amount of operation of the handle P204 to increase the shooting intensity of the game ball according to the right-handed notification effect, and changes the shooting position so that the game ball flows down to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. to (perform a right-handed stroke).

During the “round (game)” period, in the pachinko machine P of the underlying technology, the main control board P40 outputs a driving signal to the special electric accessory driving means P70, thereby causing the large winning opening P751 to enter the easy-to-enter state or It is specified that it is more advantageous for the player to be in a state where it is difficult to enter a ball, and to congratulate the player for winning a big win (minor win) in accordance with the execution period of the special game, or to shift to a normal game state after the special game is over. An effect such as an effect suggesting whether or not the player is in a game state is executed. A player shoots a game ball to the right area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the big winning hole P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

During one "round (game)" period, the opening pattern (operation mode of the special electric accessory) of the big winning opening determined based on the type of big win (minor win) is completed (opening time elapses). Alternatively, the game ends when a predetermined "specified number" (which may be expressed as "count", "C", etc.) of game balls enter the game. Then, according to the type of special game state being executed (type of big win or small win), when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to the state of "special game end demo".

Subsequently, during the "special game end demo" period, the pachinko machine P, which is the underlying technology, displays the number of game balls acquired during this special game state period, and Acquired in the special game state (acquired without transitioning to the normal game state (low probability / low base state)) to notify the total number of acquired game balls, or normal game that shifts after the special game state Effects such as the notification of the type of state and the notification related to the game method in the game state of the transition destination (such as the above-described right-handed notification effect) are executed. The player operates the steering wheel in preparation for a game corresponding to the type of normal game state to which the game is to be transferred from the effect being executed.

In many pachinko gaming machines P that are assumed, except for some exceptions, when a jackpot game as a special game state is executed, a special game state for the player is called a "specific game state" as a normal game state. The right to transition to is shifted to a state where it is easy to acquire, and the specific game state and the special game state are continuously repeated, so-called "Renso".

[Specific gaming state]
Next, a description of the "specific game state" will be given. As shown in FIG. 6, there are roughly three specific game states in the specific game state. And, there are "probability state" and "base state" as elements for classifying those types, and a specific game state is constituted by a combination thereof.

(probability state)
"Probability state" is a function that changes the probability that the lottery result will be a "big hit" in the winning lottery in the special symbol lottery. If it is expressed as "high probability (state)"("probability change state", "probability change state" when the success or failure lottery in the special symbol lottery becomes a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is not activated. There is also), and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not operating is expressed as "low probability (state)". The "high probability (state)" is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state (low probability/low base state) in that the probability of winning a big hit in one special symbol lottery is high.

(base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, the ratio (expected value) of game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired. The state in which the operation of P770 is easier (advantageous) than the normal game state (low probability / low base state) is called "high base (state)" (also called "electric support (electric support) state"). . In addition, depending on the specifications of the game machine, even if the "electric chew support function" is not activated, the recommended shooting position of the game ball is switched, so that "when a predetermined number of game balls are fired, it is possible to obtain prize balls." If the "proportion of game balls to be played" increases, it may be expressed as "high base state". "High base (state)" means that the number of game balls paid out as prize balls increases (it becomes easier to pay out) during the period until the special game state is acquired, so that the consumption of game balls is suppressed and the special This is a game state that is advantageous to the player in that the player can aim to acquire the game state.

"Electric chew support function" is a state in which the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), but mainly a combination of three functions (at least one ). The three functions that make up the “electric chew support function” are “normal symbol probability change”, “normal symbol time saving”, and “open extension (of normal electric accessories)”. "Normal pattern probability variation" refers to a state with a high probability of operating the normal electric accessories in the "normal symbol lottery". "Reduced normal symbol time" refers to a state in which the time from executing a normal symbol lottery to displaying the result of the normal symbol lottery is shortened in the normal symbol display means P53 in the main control display device P50. "Extension of opening of ordinary electric role" is, for the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery, the ordinary electric role is placed in a manner in which the game ball can easily enter the winning opening related to the ordinary electric role P770. It refers to changing so as to operate, and as an example, it corresponds to extending and lengthening the total time in which the normal electric accessory is in the easy-to-enter state.

"Normal symbol lottery" is that the above-mentioned special symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, whereas the normal symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the normal electric accessory P770. It differs in that the execution trigger is the entry of a game ball to the normal pattern operation gate device P740, but it is almost the same in that the success or failure, the pattern, and the variation pattern are determined by lottery and that it has a holding function. If you want to express the lottery of the normal pattern lottery, the pattern, and the variation pattern, you can say "normal pattern lottery", "normal pattern lottery", "normal pattern fluctuation pattern lottery", such as "normal pattern lottery" (or " Ordinary design") is attached to the beginning.

"Probability state" and "base state" have been explained as elements that distinguish the types of "specific game state", but as an element that constitutes the specific game state, there are also "time reduction state" ("fluctuation time reduction state" , a state in which the "fluctuation time reduction function" is activated). In general, the "time saving state" refers to a state in which the variable display time (variation pattern) per special symbol is shortened and the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed per unit time increases. It is an advantageous state in that many special symbol lotteries can be received per unit time. "Time saving state" (fluctuation time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the above-mentioned "high probability state" and "electric chew support state", and rarely constitutes a specific game state by itself.

[Specific game state 1: low probability / high base state]
Returning to the description of the "specific game state", first, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (1), (8) and (12) in FIG. As the game state transition conditions of (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. ) only) and so on. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 1 goes back to the specific game state 1 via a jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, transitions are made as shown in (2), (7), and (11) in FIG. These game state transition conditions (2), (7), and (11) are (c) to obtain a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 1, and (d). The elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(2) only) can be mentioned. It should be noted that the "number of games played" refers to, for example, "the number of times a special symbol lottery is executed".

When shifting to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, both the above-described "electric chew support function" and "fluctuation time reduction function" are activated. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area is the normal figure operation gate device P740, and the second start winning relating to the ordinary electric accessory A mouth P721 is arranged, and the player can easily receive a normal symbol lottery and a special symbol lottery by performing "right-handed hitting" in which a game ball is shot to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is assumed, is also controlled in the above-described "time saving state" in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, when the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) occurs, the player shoots the game ball to the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area, Entering (passing) the operation gate device P740 is performed as the first procedure, and by entering (passing) the normal pattern operation gate device P740, the normal symbol lottery is received in the main control board P40. The normal symbol lottery in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is a hit with a high probability (about 1/1) due to the operation of the normal pattern probability variation function, so the game ball is 1 to the normal pattern operation gate device P740. When the ball enters (passes), one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 occurs. When the normal electric accessory P770 operates, the pachinko game machine P on which the premise is, the second start winning opening P721 that triggers the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol becomes easy to enter, and the player continues the second. As a procedure, a game ball is shot toward the second start winning opening P721. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole P721, the detection information is input to the main control board P40, the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the execution right of the special game (big win, small win). A lottery related to the acquisition of is executed.

The specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition conditions (for example, if the execution of the jackpot, the type of jackpot executed, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). In the case of winning a small winning game, it is often assumed that the specific game state does not end, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, winning a small winning game (or winning multiple small winning games, or In some cases, it is designed to end with the acquisition of a small winning game. When the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

[Specific game state 2: high probability / high base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (3), (7) and (9) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (A) to obtain a big hit game in each state. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 2 is transferred to the specific game state 2 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are satisfied, transitions are made as shown in (4), (8), and (10) in FIG. These (4), (8), and (10) game state transition conditions are (a) to acquire a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 2, (c) For example, a predetermined number of games has passed.

When moving to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, the "probability change function" was further activated for the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state). It differs in that it is "high probability (state)". The progress of the game and the method of playing in the specific game state 2 are the same as those in the specific game state 1, and the difference is that the player can win the big win earlier than the special symbol lottery because the probability of winning the big win is high. do.

The specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, if the big win is executed, the type of the executed jackpot, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). It is common that the specific game state 2 is not terminated in the case of winning a small winning game. If the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) ends due to the number of games played, normal game state (low probability / low base state), specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state), specific game state Go to 3 (high probability/low base state).

[Specific game state 3: high probability / low base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (5), (10) and (11) in FIG. As the game state transition conditions of (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. ) only) and so on. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 3 is transferred to the specific game state 3 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, transitions are made as shown in (6), (9), and (12) in FIG. These (6), (9), and (12) game state transition conditions are (c) to obtain a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 3, (d) The elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(6) only) can be mentioned.

When moving to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated "high probability (state)", specific game state 1 and specific game Unlike state 2, the "electric chew support function" and the "fluctuation time reduction function" are not activated. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the normal figure operation gate device P740 in the right side area P501 (right hitting area) of the game area, and the second start winning relating to the ordinary electric accessory Although the mouth P721 is arranged, it is assumed that in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), the player hits to the right by shooting a game ball to the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area. Also, the probability of winning a hit in the normal pattern lottery is low, and there is no advantage in hitting right.

Therefore, the player proceeds with the game by shooting the game ball to the left area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area, and since this is a high-probability state, there is a high probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery. The game method and game progress are the same as those in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) except that the jackpot game can be obtained early because of the high value.

The specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is predetermined by the game state transition conditions (for example, if the big win is executed, the type of the executed jackpot, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). It is common that the specific game state 3 is not terminated in the case of winning a small winning game. When the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

In addition, the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is different from the board arrangement configuration of FIG. Arrangement configuration of winning devices on the game board, such as by arranging the third start winning port of the type that does not have and activating the "time saving state" so that many special symbol lotteries can be received in a short time And depending on the control of the time saving state, there may be a game state where "right hitting" is recommended.

As described above, the premised pachinko gaming machine P progresses through a plurality of game states, but does not necessarily have all the game states described above. Therefore, among game machine specifications constituted by combinations of a plurality of game states, etc., game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted in the premise pachinko game machine P are exemplified below.

Regarding representative game machine specifications ("specs"), examples of the types of game machine specifications related to the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery are "(until the next time) probability change", "ST (number of times cut probability change)". , “V probability variation (also called “ball probability” and “attack round system”)”, and “latency probability variation” can be adopted. The difference in gaming machine specifications due to the difference in the probability variation function is sometimes expressed as "this gaming machine is a '○○ machine (eg: ST machine)'". In addition, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability variation function, by passing through the specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game, the accessory continuous operating device will then operate (that is, shift to the big winning game). There is also a game machine specification called "small hit V".

[(Until the next time) fixed]
First of all, I will explain “(until the next time) probability change”. "Variable probability until the next time" is generally, among the plurality of specific game states provided in the pachinko game machine P, the most advantageous game state among the above-mentioned specific game states, "Specific game state 2 ( High probability/high base state) will continue until the next jackpot game right is acquired"Pachinko game machine specifications". In other words, the gaming machine with the “probability change until the next time” is configured so that the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until the right to the next big hit game is acquired, and does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations. It is

It should be noted that depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Also, in the "pachinko machine that continues until the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) acquires the right to play the next big hit", the probability variation function continues until the next big hit. It may be called "probability change until next time", but the base state is "low base state", and the same game as the normal game state (low probability / low base state) may be required for the electric chew support function. , In this way, it is expressed as "latency probability change" because it is probability change until the next time when the electric chew support function is not operating.

[ST (Variable number of cuts)]
Next, "ST (Variable number of cut probability)" will be explained. "ST" is an abbreviation of "Special Time", and generally, "special game state 2 (high probability / high base state) performs a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of times symbol variation is executed) or the pachinko game machine that will continue until the right to win the jackpot game" is shown.

It should be noted that depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Also, in the same way as the above-mentioned "probability change until the next time", the game state is a specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). For cases to be controlled, it is also possible to configure so as to have a state called "latency probability change (latency ST)".

In addition, even if it is "ST (variable number of cuts)", the period in which the game state is controlled to ST, such as when the special symbol lottery lottery is "until 10000 times", is substantially in a high probability state If it is a gaming machine specification that can be said to guarantee a big hit until the next time, it may be expressed as "until the next time".

As mentioned above, "probability change until the next time" and "ST (number of times cut probability change)" are different in terms of the end of the probability change function of the special symbol lottery, which distinguishes the "probability change state" as a game machine specification is. On the other hand, as in "V probability variation (" ball probability "" attack round system ")" described below, whether or not the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery in the specific game state is activated, that is, regarding the start of execution of the probability variation function, Game machine specifications (“specs”) may be expressed by requiring special conditions.

[V probability change]
Next, a game machine specification called "V probability variation" will be described. "V probability change" is a "specific area P750"("Vzone","Varea", etc.) provided in the big winning opening P751 during the jackpot game before the game state shifts to the specific game state. ), when the passage of the game ball ("V winning") is detected under predetermined conditions (such as during the execution of a specific jackpot round), the probability variation function is activated after the jackpot game The game machine specifications of the pachinko game machine that performs control to shift to the specific game state (specific game state 1 or specific game state 3) are shown. Regarding the “specific region” used for “V probability variation”, it may be particularly referred to as “probability variation function operating region”.

As described above, "V probability variation" is a gaming machine specification that indicates whether or not the probability variation function is activated depends on the game result during the big hit game (depends on whether the game ball passes through the specific area P760). Yes, depending on whether the activated probability variation function ends with the same control as the previously described "probability variation until the next time" or ends with control equivalent to "ST" "V probability variation (V-loop) ” and “V-ST” are used to indicate game machine specifications.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P that adopts "V probability change" as a game machine specification, if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, the probability change function does not operate after the jackpot game, and the normal game state and the specific game It is controlled to state 1 (low probability/high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not the game state in which the probability variation function is activated after the big win game, depending on whether or not the V prize is won, and at the same time, it is possible to change the operation mode of the electric chew support function. As an example, in the "V probability variation (V-loop)" machine, if you win a V prize, the probability variation function and electric chew support function will continue until you win the next big hit, and if you do not win a V prize, the probability variation function will not operate. First, the electric chew support function is limited until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times.

[small hit V]
Next, a description will be given of a game machine specification (spec) called "small win V" as a game machine specification capable of providing a game state advantageous to a player in terms of winning a big win without having a probability variation function.

"Small hit V" is a "specific area P760" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.), the game machine specification that activates the accessory continuous operation device following the small winning game, that is, starts the big winning game. be. In other words, it is a game machine specification that allows a big win game to be obtained without obtaining a big win result as a result of a special symbol lottery by passing through the specific area P760 during a small win.

"Small win V" is a "type 1 (pachinko)" game that activates the continuous activation device and special electric accessories as a result of the special symbol lottery, and the special electric accessories while the continuous activation device is not in operation. It is a specification that activates the role continuous operation device when passing through the specific area P760 during operation (during the opening of the big winning hole P751), and is sometimes referred to as "1st class small win V", while the conventional pachinko game It is sometimes referred to as a "mixture of 1 type and 2 types" because it has playability similar to the specifications of so-called "2 types of pachinko" machines.

In general, a pachinko game machine that adopts "small hit V" as a game machine specification does not have a variable probability function (probability variable function), and changes the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of an electronic chew support function. That is, when the electric chew support function is activated, the winning opening related to the normal electric role product P770, which is easy to win, becomes a change trigger for special symbols (for example, winning a small win at 1/2) that makes it easy to win a small win. By constructing a starting winning port, it is easy to win a small win under the condition that an electric chewing support function is operating, and it is possible to aim for a big win by winning a V prize during a small winning game. By doing so, it is possible to increase the possibility of obtaining a big win by a small win instead of increasing the random number range of the big win like the variable probability function.

[Other game machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical ones, and since there are several other characteristic game machine specifications known, they will be briefly described below.

(limiter)
"Limiter" is a state in which a specific game state in which the probability variation function and the electric chew support function are activated occurs repeatedly with the execution of the jackpot game (so-called "Consecutive" state). Even if a jackpot game that should originally operate the probability variation function or the electric chew support function is executed when the set number of repetitions (number of consecutive games) is reached, the probability variation function or the electric chew support function It is a function that restricts the operation. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "probability variable limiter", and the function that limits the "electric chew support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "time-saving limiter (electric support limiter)". call. A game machine having a limiter function is called a "limiter machine".

(Fall)
"Falling" is a game machine that executes a "falling lottery" that determines whether or not to end the probability variation function every time a special symbol lottery is performed during the period when the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery is operating. Show specifications. In the situation where the electric chew support function is operating along with the probability fluctuation function, if you win the fall lottery, the operation of the electric chew support function will end when the probability fluctuation function ends, or only the probability fluctuation function will end. However, the operation of the electric chew support function may continue.

In addition, it is possible to combine a plurality of game machine specifications described above. 1) Winning the fall lottery, (2) Performing a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, (3) Acquiring the right to play a big hit, If either of these conditions is satisfied, the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) ends (shifts to another game state).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 governing the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, will be described. It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the description of the present embodiment, will be described on the premise of a pachinko gaming machine that adopts "ST (variable number of cuts)" as the gaming machine specifications (specs) described above. . In the description of the embodiment, the notation of "P-s ◯◯" indicating the processing step in the figure is described as "step ◯◯" in the text.

[Main control board power-on processing (main control board main loop processing)]
The main control board P40 of the premised pachinko game machine P first executes a power-on process (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. Here, details of the power-on process will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on processing is started in the main control board P40 of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, the initial setting relating to the operation of the CPU, which is the arithmetic device provided on the main control board P40, is performed (step 1002). The initial setting is to appropriately perform settings necessary for subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initial setting is completed, input port confirmation processing (step 1004) and power failure information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) are executed. ).

More specifically, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is a "set value ” can be changed, and the flag indicating whether or not the ``setting confirmation process'' for confirming the ``setting value'' is in the state of performing This is a process of generating information for determining whether or not to be established (whether to turn on) in the game stop state setting process to be performed later. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the detection status of the frame open switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is opened with respect to the outer frame), and the detection status of whether the ram clear switch P48 is operated by the player , data including data indicating whether or not the setting key switch P49 is rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006), the pachinko game machine P normally shuts down the power when the power was turned off last time, and the control data related to the game state when the power shut-off occurred normally. This is a process for confirming whether the data is normally saved and stored in the storage area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, the game is stopped in the game stop state setting process (step 1008) described later as an error. This is the process of setting (turning on) a flag to stop.

In the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), after the process in the power-on process is completed and the process shifts to the main loop process to start the game, a flag is set to prevent the player from actually playing the game. Based on the results of the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power failure information confirmation/checksum process (step 1006), the "setting change status", "setting confirmation status", and "unrecoverable status" are displayed. This is a process of setting a flag for shifting to any game progress disallowed state of "error state". Details of the "game stop state setting process" are described in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, first, it is determined whether the frame is open based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko game machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1" Therefore, the subsequent processing of step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, it is assumed that some of the essential operations for executing the setting change process are not satisfied, and the 1 generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004). Operation information of the setting key switch is calculated from the byte data so that it becomes OFF data. Although not shown, whether the result in step 1102 is YES or NO, calculation is performed so that the frame open bit in the 1-byte data is also OFF data.

In the subsequent step 1104, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that allows determination of "there is a setting change operation". In the premise pachinko game machine P, the situation where it is determined that "there is a setting change operation" is (1) the frame opening switch P131 is ON (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on), and (2) the setting key switch P49 is ON. and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is ON. As described above, among the 1-byte data, the information of the frame open switch P131 is set to OFF, and it is determined in this step whether both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, if two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that there is a setting change operation (the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1"; One data may be "0"). Then, if it is determined that there has been a setting change operation, that is, if it is determined YES in step 1104, data indicating "setting being changed" is stored as a game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is terminated ( step 1106, step 1118). On the other hand, if NO is determined in step 1104 , the process proceeds to step 1108 . In addition, when the setting value information stored in the RAM (RAM=Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (in the case of recovery operation from an unrecoverable error state), as the initial setting value The data corresponding to the setting value "1" is set in the setting value storage area (step 1118).

Next, at step 1108, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred. A game stop error is an error that requires RAM clearing and setting (change) processing of setting values when the game cannot proceed, such as checksum abnormality (RAM abnormality) or setting value abnormality. refers to The determination of step 1108 determines whether or not to set the game stop state based on the processing result of the power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored during the previous power-off processing. . When it is determined that an error state should be established (when determined as YES in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is terminated (steps 1110 and 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1112 .

In the subsequent step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated. In the game stop state setting process, as a state when proceeding to the step,
(a) When an operation to shift to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, in the determination of "there is a setting change operation", (1) the frame opening switch P131 is ON (frame is being opened when the power is turned on). , (2) the setting key switch P49 is ON, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is ON, is not satisfied,
(a) when the ram clear operation for data clear is performed, in other words, (2) the setting key switch P49 is on, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. when it is sufficient,
(c) When the power is turned on without performing any operations such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", "ram clear operation",
Either In these states, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) are: (a) bit data indicating ON/OFF of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (ON data)"; Either the bit data indicating ON/OFF of the operation detection state of P48 is "1 (ON data)" or (C) all 1-byte data is OFF data (for example, all bits "0").

Then, in step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated, and if there has been a ram clear operation (if YES is determined in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine enters the game ready state after clearing the ram. In order to make the transition, a process of clearing the game stop state flag is performed (step 1114). On the other hand, except when the RAM clear operation is performed, the current 1-byte data is set as it is. If NO), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1-byte data indicating the game stop state flag is stored as data indicating "setting confirmation" ( step 1118). Further, when there is neither a RAM clear operation nor an operation to shift to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 1004) is originally data indicating that the game is not stopped as a game stop state flag. It is set as no-game-stop information.

Regarding the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), if a value indicating some stop state is stored, the main flag which is the game allowable state in the power-on process (step 1000) In the interrupt processing (step 2000) which is the main part of the game progress control executed after the transition to the loop (steps 1028 to 1036), the value indicating the stopped state is referred to, and the progress of the game described as "basic game progress" These controls will be described later in the description of interrupt processing.

Returning to the description of the power-on process in FIG. 7, the following process will be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) ends, it is determined whether or not there is a RAM clear operation (step 1010). The ram clear operation is that the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. This processing is executed both when the setting key switch P49 is off and when it is on. If it is determined in step 1010 that the ram clear operation has been performed, a predetermined portion of the memory area of the ram of the main control board P40 is initialized.

In the subsequent processing from step 1014 to step 1020, a processing of setting an effect control command (effect command) for recognizing the state of the game machine from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 when the power is turned on is performed. More specifically, in step 1014, processing is performed to clear from the storage area the effect control commands that have not been transmitted when the power was cut off last time (when the power was cut off). Then, in step 1016, information about the current game state of the main control board P40 that has returned after power-on is generated as an effect control command. An effect control command indicating the played state is set in an area for storing the transmission data of the effect control command.

When the processing related to the setting of the effect control command at the time of power-on is completed, the necessary data (driving signal ) is output from the output port to the special electric accessory drive means P70 and the normal electric accessory drive means P71. (Step 1022)

Then, when the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on processing is completed, the CPU of the main control board P40 is processed to set the generation interval of the interrupt processing time (step 1024). In the premise pachinko game machine P, the interval at which interrupt processing ( FIG. 9 , step 2000 ) to be described later is executed is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process ends, the game shifts to a cyclic process called a main loop in which the player is ready to play, and the cyclic process in the main loop is repeated until a power failure occurs.

(Main loop)
In the main loop processing of the main control board, as shown in FIG. 7, first, in step 1026, processing is performed to prohibit the occurrence of interrupt processing, and until the processing of the main loop is completed (interrupt is permitted in step 1036). (until) limit the execution of interrupt processing.

When the interrupt is disabled, in the following step 1028, a watchdog timer called a CPU for the main control board P40 runs out of control (such as a situation where the process loops and does not proceed) to monitor the occurrence. Clears (initializes) the area that stores the clock information.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (for example, whether a power failure signal sent based on a voltage drop from the power supply board P44 is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). If a power failure occurs, the current game state is stored, power failure information and checksum information are stored, and power failure processing (step 1032) stops processing of the main control board P40 as a CPU. ). If power failure has not occurred, the process proceeds to the next step.

In step 1034, a process of updating the random number used for the special symbol lottery and the random number value used for the normal symbol lottery is performed. Some of these random values are updated in interrupt processing, which will be described later, and this is processing to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant due to random numbers being updated only in interrupt processing. If there are processes that are executed irregularly in the interrupt process, it is also possible to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating random numbers according to those processes. Therefore, it is not essential to provide random number update processing in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final processing in the main loop, and performs processing for enabling interrupts. Immediately after that, the process returns to step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop, to disable interrupts. If the CPU of the main control board P40 receives an input indicating the state of the state that the state has been set, an interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (also called "timer interrupt processing") performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIG. In the premised pachinko game machine P, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and the submodule program provided to be changeable according to the game machine specifications (spec) is universally fixed. are configured to be read out and controlled in the order of The processing for these submodules is briefly described below.

(clear watchdog timer)
At the beginning of interrupt processing, watchdog timer clear processing is provided. This process is the same as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation processing)
In the input port confirmation process, by confirming the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, it is possible to identify whether or not there is input information as information necessary for judgment in subsequent processes. This is the process to generate. (Step 2004)

The information input to the input port includes an input signal indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and the setting key switch P49, and an input signal indicating the operation status (whether touched or not) of the handle P204. , An input signal indicating the game result by detecting a game ball such as a special figure 1 starter switch P712 and a large winning opening switch P752, a magnetic sensor P73, a door open sensor P131, a vibration detection sensor P72, etc. provided for fraud monitoring There is an input signal that indicates the detection status of the sensor.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that becomes the same data (same bit) in all readings is the input data ("level data") for this interrupt. ) in the RAM of the main control board P40. Of the data read three times, the data that was determined in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4 ms before) is adopted as the level data for the portion that is not the same data in all the readings. If the data cannot be read normally in the above, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Then, when the input data (level data) for this interrupt is determined, a comparison operation is performed with the input data for the previous interrupt to generate "rising data" (data specifying the bit where the input data changed from off to on), Stores data specifying the switch that has been switched to ON input by the interrupt this time.

(random number update process)
Random number update process is software This is a process of updating so-called soft random numbers, which are random numbers to be updated (step 2006). In the premised pachinko game machine P, the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are those in which the random number generation circuit updates the random numbers at the update cycle on the circuit, and those which are updated at the software cycle. By combining them, it is configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers when obtaining random numbers.

In the random number update process, as described above, the process of updating the soft random numbers is performed.
(a) A random number is updated by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1), and if the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range is exceeded, the lower limit (or upper limit) is set;
(b) Subtracting (or adding) an arbitrary prime number to the random number, and adding (or subtracting) the value of the random number range +1 (or the random number range -1) when the random number range is exceeded,
(c) Repeatedly increment (or decrement) from the random number set as the initial value, and when one cycle of updating is completed, set the separately updated "initial random number" as the new initial value and perform the same update. Repeated ones (also called initial value updating random numbers),
Various update methods can be exemplified. It should be noted that any update method may be adopted as long as the randomness of the random numbers can be maintained, without being limited to the methods exemplified above.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting changing" or "setting checking". (Step 2008)

In the setting control process, it is first determined whether the bit data indicating that the setting key operation of the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on process is ON data. If the setting key has not been turned on when the power is turned on, this process is exited.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated in the game stop flag is ON data, the current interrupt Referring to the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the process (generated in the input port confirmation process described above), when the setting key switch P49 is turned off, the game stop flag is cleared and the game is enabled. An effect control command for returning (or starting) the effect to the effect control board is set depending on whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state".

Also, in the power-on process (see FIG. 7), if the game stop flag is "changing settings", the role of the "setting change switch" at this interrupt timing is played until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. Check the operating status of the ram clear switch P48 (switch operated to change the set value). When the game stop flag is "under change of setting", in the current interruption, when the rising data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated, the "set value" is changed to the next in the predetermined change order. Change the data so that it becomes the set value. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine P having set value data such that the setting is switched in order from 1 to 6, every time there is start-up data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the setting is set in this setting control process. Perform processing to increase the value by "1" (when the set value before the operation is 6, it is changed to 1 as the next value).

In the premise pachinko game machine P, by providing the processing in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 9), the operation of the setting key switch and the setting change switch is monitored at the cycle of the interrupt processing. A program for periodic monitoring during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) that enables the output of display data to the display device by the LED output process described later, and the interrupt process cannot be set separately (see FIG. 7) can be omitted. Note that, during the power-on process, it may be configured to monitor switches related to setting changes and setting confirmation, control the display device, and update the set values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
In the game stop monitoring process, the CPU of the main control board reads the data of the game stop flag generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) executed when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, and determines whether the game is stopped. This is a process to confirm whether (Step 2010)

In the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, if the game stop flag data is not 0 but one of the bits is "1 ”, it is determined that the game is in a stopped state (a state in which the game needs to be stopped), and assuming that the game is stopped, part of the processing during the interrupt processing (“timer subtraction processing (step 2014)” in FIG. 9 to “special electric Accessory control process (step 2028)") are omitted.

In the premise pachinko gaming machine P, as a state in which the game needs to be stopped, that is, in a state in which the player cannot play the game, "setting changing", "setting checking", "unrecoverable error" is occurring" can be exemplified.

(Timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating the timer data used for time management regarding the progress of the game (step 2014).

Examples of timer data update processing include management of the variable display time set when the variable display of special symbols is started, operation time of the special electric accessory P755 during the big hit game (open time of the big winning opening P751 ) and other timer data update processing triggered by game progress, timing processing for error determination such as detecting ball clogging, LED lighting pattern in main control display device P50 such as special symbol display devices P51 and P52 and a process for timing a period for outputting information from the external information output terminal P77 or the like to an external device (such as a hall computer).

The timer data to be updated by the timer update process is stored in the storage area (ram storage area) of the main control board P40, divided by type of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer". Each is stored in a storage area.

In the timer update process, processes such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" are performed on the storage area that stores the types of individual timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. I do. In the timer update process, the timer data stored in the storage area is decremented (-1). If the stored timer data is already "0", it will be processed to be "0" even after processing (if it becomes a negative value, it will be set to "0", Do not decrement if "0", etc.).

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the cycle of one interrupt is 4 ms, so in the case of 1-byte timer data, only the managed object that ends in a maximum of 255 updates (about 1 second) is controlled. It is possible, but if there is no game information managed within one second (when there is little), it is possible to configure only with 2-byte timer data and without 1-byte timer update processing. is. Also, if it is necessary to manage a time value that cannot be managed with a 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage a longer time than a "3-byte timer".

(Effective period setting process)
Validity period setting processing is a period for controlling the easy-to-enter mode or the difficult-to-enter mode for winning holes that can be changed to the easy-to-enter mode or the difficult-to-enter mode (mainly the big winning hole P751 and the winning hole related to the normal electric accessory P770). And, it is a process of setting the valid period in the valid extension period, and setting the invalid period for the other period (when the winning opening is in the difficult-to-enter state and the valid extension period is not valid). (Step 2016)

In the premise pachinko game machine, the winning of the second start winning opening P721, which is the second starting winning opening P720 provided with the large winning opening P751 as the big winning device and the normal electric accessory P770, is set as the valid period. It becomes the processing to do.

In addition, during the effective extension period, in order to treat the game ball entered at the timing just before the large winning opening P751 or the normal electric role P770 shifts to the difficult entry mode P755) and ordinary electric accessories such as P770 are treated as effective periods even after the control period for executing the opening control has passed. control period.

Further, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, when the specific area P760 (V area) is provided, an effective extension period for the passage of the game ball with respect to the specific area P760 may be set. The validity period of the specific area is also set.

(Prize monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the winning of game balls to various winning ports (large winning port P751, starting ports P711, P721, general winning port P731) in the pachinko game machine, It is a process of generating information that triggers the process of generating (occurrence of suspension) the right of special symbol lottery for balls and starting entrance balls. (Step 2018)

The contents of the processing are (a) detecting the presence or absence of a winning prize for each of the various winning ports in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004); If there is a winning during the valid period, and if there is a valid winning for each winning slot, (c) a performance control command indicating winning information for each winning slot to be sent to the performance control board P41. setting, (d) updating a counter value (referred to as a "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of operation triggers based on winning for each winning opening (in other words, among operations based on detection of various winning openings); update a counter value that stores the number of unprocessed operations in ).

In addition, in the winning monitoring process, not only the occurrence of winnings to various winning holes, but also the out ball detection switch P792 provided for counting out balls, the operation hole switch P742 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game machine Depending on the specification, it is also determined whether the game ball enters or passes through the specific area P760 (V area), and in addition to the occurrence of the prize ball and the occurrence of the special symbol lottery, the operation of the gaming machine (for example, In this process, presence or absence of detection of the game ball required for the process of transmitting information indicating that the operation port switch P742 or the specific area P760 has passed is performed with respect to the effect control board P41.

(Working opening monitoring process)
In the operation port monitoring process, when the normal pattern operation port switch P742 start-up data is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), processing related to the occurrence of a hold related to the normal symbol lottery is performed. conduct. (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal pattern operation port switch P742 is detected, the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is confirmed, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, a random number is stored as a new reservation. Because it is possible, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the number of reservations and increasing the number of reservations information by 1, the general pattern accuracy random number, the general pattern random number, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number Get it from the generator circuit or get the current corresponding soft random number and store it as pending.

(Normal symbol control process)
In the normal symbol control process, normal symbol lottery, normal symbol fluctuation display, and normal electric accessory P770 are processed (step 2022). These processes shift to different submodule processes depending on whether the data indicating the control state of the normal symbol called normal symbol status or the control state of the normal electric accessory is performed, and control is performed according to the state. As the status of the normal design, "0: Normal design waiting", "1: Normal design changing", "2: Normal design stop display", "3: Normal electric accessory in operation", "4: Normal "Demonstrating the end of electric accessories" is available, and processing is performed according to each state.

<<Normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process>>
The normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: normal symbol standby".

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to change the normal symbol has not occurred, so the normal symbol control process is exited. On the other hand, if the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it means that the normal symbol fluctuation right has occurred, and it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation start conditions are satisfied, and the normal symbol fluctuation is started. Execute the process related to start.

When it is determined to start changing the normal pattern, after subtracting 1 from the holding number information from the area that stores the holding number information related to the normal pattern lottery, the general pattern success or failure random number, the general pattern random number, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number are respectively Call it and perform a general pattern lottery, a general pattern pattern lottery, and a general pattern variation pattern lottery, store the lottery results in the storage area of the main control board, clear the random number information used this time, and save the storage area for the pending number information. While performing a process of shifting so as to be processed in the stored order, the normal design status is updated to "1: during normal design fluctuation". Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used according to the operation status of the above-mentioned "base state" (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction function), and it is easy to win in the high base state. , The variable display time of normal symbols tends to be determined to be short.

《Processing during normal symbol fluctuation》
The normal design changing process is a sub-module process called from the normal design control process when the normal design status is "1: normal design changing".

In the normal symbol fluctuation process, the normal symbol fluctuation display time corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined during the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process elapses, that is, the timer that manages the normal symbol fluctuation display (normal Until the symbol variation display timer) becomes 0 in the timer update process, the normal symbol display device P53 is a process of executing variation display of normal symbols.

More specifically, when the normal symbol fluctuation display timer is not 0, the maximum value of the general pattern display switching counter is "5" every time this process is executed, and the general pattern display switching counter is " 5", a process of storing information on the next light emission pattern is performed in a storage area for storing data for designating the light emission pattern of the LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device P53. It should be noted that the normal map display switching counter is reset to the initial value of "0" at the timing when it reaches the maximum value of "5". That is, the variable display of the normal design is such that the lighting pattern of the normal design display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interrupts (4ms×5=20ms). In addition, the switching interval can be set as appropriate, for example, if the maximum value of the normal pattern display switching counter is set to 25, the display pattern of the normal pattern display device P53 is switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms). be done.

When the normal pattern fluctuation display time ends, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display timer is "0", in this process, the display pattern of the normal pattern stop display pattern determined by the normal pattern lottery is displayed on the main control display device. The data for designating the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the storage area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal design display device P53 so that it is stopped and displayed on the normal design display device P53 in P50. Then, the normal symbol fixed time (time for displaying the stop display symbol) is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: during normal symbol stop display".

<<Normal symbol stop display process>>
The normal symbol stop display process is a sub-module process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: normal symbol stop display".

In the normal symbol stop display process, it is confirmed whether the value of the normal symbol stop display timer, in which the symbol fixed time is set at the end of the normal symbol fluctuation process, is "0", and at the timing when it becomes "0" Then, a setting process for moving to the next game operation is performed.

When the normal pattern stop display timer becomes "0", if the result of this normal pattern lottery is "hit", according to the winning pattern and the operating state of the base state (normal electric accessory extension function) , Call the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770, set the operation pattern, clear the prize counter related to the normal electric accessory P770, etc., and set the normal symbol status to "3: Normal electric accessory in operation ”.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0", if the result of this normal symbol lottery is "lost", the normal symbol status is updated to "0: normal symbol waiting". I do.

《Processing during operation of ordinary electric accessories》
The normal electric auditors product operating process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: normal electric auditors product in operation".

In the normal electric accessory operating process, based on the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770 set in the normal symbol stop display process, the opening operation (change to easy entry mode) and closing operation of the normal electric accessory (Change to difficult-to-ball mode) and monitor the establishment of the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory. The end of the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is (a) when the specified number of normal electric accessories winning set as the end condition of the normal electric accessory occurs, (b) the operation of the preset operation pattern ends This is the case (when the opening operation period of the normal electric accessories has ended).

When the condition for ending the operation of the normal electric accessory is established, the timer area for storing the effective extension period of the normal electric accessory is used to measure the extended period of a certain time predetermined corresponding to the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770. set the time. Then, the time value related to the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration is set to the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the normal symbol status is set to "4: Normal electric accessory end demonstration in progress".

《Demonstration process for ending operation of ordinary electric accessories》
The normal electric auditors product operation end demonstration process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "4: normal electric auditors product end demonstration".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration process, wait until the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation process becomes "0", and the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer becomes "0" When it becomes, the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: normal symbol standby" is performed.

(Starting door monitoring process)
Starting port monitoring processing, from the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004), when the rising data of the special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 and the special figure 2 starting opening switch P722 are generated, a special symbol lottery Perform processing related to the occurrence of the hold related to. (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special figure 1 starter switch P712 and the special figure 2 starter switch P722 are detected, check the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit , because it is possible to store a random number as a new hold, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area storing the hold number and increasing the hold number information by 1, the success or failure random number, pattern random number, variation pattern A random number is obtained from the random number generator or the current corresponding soft random number is obtained and stored as pending.

It should be noted that, in the pachinko gaming machine P, as a premise, there are two types of special symbols, a first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 1) and a second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 2). Since the symbols are provided, for each starting port provided on the game board P5, the holding number of the corresponding special symbol and the data of the starting port switch are called, and the pending number is added and the random number is acquired for each starting port. is processed.

In addition, when the starting opening to be processed is composed of the starting opening (electric chew) related to the normal electric accessory, the starting opening winning related to the normal electric accessory P770 is valid in the valid period setting process described above. After judging whether or not it is performed within the period, if it is within the effective period, the above-described processing is performed.

In addition, when storing random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers, the obtained random number information is used in advance by using the advance notice judgment value table, and the content of the variation when the variation based on the various random numbers to be withheld is executed in advance. Information that can be guessed is generated, and notified as an effect control command to the effect control board P41 (referred to as "pre-determination command", "pre-determination information", and "pre-reading determination command"). Pre-judgment commands are generated for each of the win/fail random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers, and when transmitted to the effect control board P41, the effect control board P41 uses the lottery related to the execution of the "prefetch effect" described later. be done.

(Special symbol control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) includes state information for managing special symbols called special symbol status (also referred to as "special symbol status") and special electric accessory status (also referred to as "special electric game status"). Depending on the state information for managing the operating state of the called special electric accessory, any of the special symbol variation start management (special symbol variation start monitoring control process), special symbol variation process, and special symbol stop symbol display process or

The special symbol status includes "0: waiting for special symbol fluctuation", "1: special symbol fluctuating", "2: missing symbol stopped display", "3: big hit symbol stopped displayed", "4: small hit The status of the special electric role product is "0: Waiting for winning", "1: Special electric role product in operation", "2: Closed big prize opening", "3 : Big win end demonstration in progress", "4: Small win special electric power in operation", "5: Small win closed", and "6: Small win end demonstration in progress". It should be noted that, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, there may be cases where no small win is provided, and in that case, there is no status data related to the small win. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

The special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority order) when there are a plurality of special symbols. As a predetermined order, the second special symbol is preferentially controlled, and in the situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held, the second special symbol is changed first. The game machine specification processed so as to be started (the second special symbol preferentially fluctuates) is called "second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control", and the implementation of the pachinko game machine P as a premise In the description related to the form, the processing related to this type will be illustrated and described.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When the control of the second special symbol is started, the information of the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the special electric accessary product status is referred to first. If the special electric role product status is data indicating that the big win game or the small win game is in progress (when the special electric role product status is other than "0: waiting for winning"), the first special symbol is fluctuating. If the special symbol status of the special symbol is other than "0: waiting for special symbol variation", the process is completed without performing the process.

When the situation is such that the control of the second special symbol is executed, a process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area storing the timer, and if the result of the decrement is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the update of the timer ends, based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2, a sub-module process, which will be described later, is called and executed. Although it has a timer subtraction process even during the interrupt process, the timer data updated by the special symbol control process is not included in the timer updated by the timer subtraction process, and in the special symbol control process It manages timer data for control related to special symbols.

<<Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process>>
The special symbol variation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "0: waiting for special symbol variation".

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol being processed as a target is reserved, and if there is no reservation, the process is finished, and if there is a reservation, the subsequent process is executed. The subsequent process is a special symbol lottery that is performed when the fluctuation is started. In the special symbol lottery, first, the data stored as set values are read and inspected to determine whether or not the set value information is appropriate. If the set value is appropriate, the data in the area storing each flag indicating the game state etc. is referred to, and the appropriate lottery table is selected. After being stored in the storage area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: during special symbol fluctuation". In addition, the content determined by the special symbol lottery is transmitted to the performance control board P41 as a performance control command (win/fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command), and the content of the variable performance executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. is used as information for determination processing (lottery processing). The details of the special symbol lottery will be described later.

《Processing during special symbol fluctuation》
The special symbol fluctuating process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "1: special symbol fluctuating".

In the special symbol variation process, the timer for managing the variation display time of the special symbol is monitored until the variation time of the special symbol determined by the variation pattern lottery passes, and until the remaining variation time becomes "0", every interruption. With the special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24") to be updated, the special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (at the time of control of special symbol 1) to show the variable display of the special symbol every 25 interrupts performs switching processing of the lighting display pattern of the first special symbol display device P51)).

When the remaining variable display time of the special symbols becomes "0", it indicates that the variable display of the special symbols has been executed once for an external device (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko game machine P. Setting of information for outputting an external signal, processing of setting a symbol fixation time for fixed display of a special symbol stop display pattern, and stop display indicating a stop display pattern determined as a result of a win-or-fail lottery and a pattern lottery. Setting of lighting pattern data for displaying the pattern on the special pattern display device P52 (P51) is performed. Then, the special symbol status is set to any one of ``2: Losing symbols are stopped and displayed'', ``3: Big win symbols are stopped and displayed'', and ``4: Small win symbols are stopped and displayed'' according to the result of the lottery.

<<Process during special symbol missing symbol stop display>>
The special symbol lost symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "2: during lost symbol stop display".

In the special symbol lost symbol stop display process, it is checked whether the value of the timer for managing the symbol fixing time set in the special symbol fluctuation process has become "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes a processing target. Update the special symbol status of the special symbol that is currently running to "0: special symbol variation standby", and the remaining game count of the game state (probability variation function, electric chew support function, variation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery As well as updating, it confirms whether the end condition is satisfied, and when the game state transition condition is satisfied, it performs control (flag off, etc.) related to the transition of the game state.

<<Processing during special symbol jackpot symbol stop display>>
The special symbol big-hit symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "3: big-hit symbol stop display".

In the special symbol big hit symbol stop display processing, it is checked whether the value of the timer managing the symbol fixing time set in the special symbol fluctuation processing has become "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes a processing target. While updating the special symbol status of the special symbol that is being played to "0: special symbol variation standby", the special electric role product status is updated to "2: large winning opening closed". Furthermore, in order to end the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery, the processing of clearing the remaining number of times information storage area and the operation flag storage area is executed. Then, in order to execute a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot pattern, the information in various storage areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized from the jackpot pattern information, and the special electric role product P755 is controlled during the jackpot game. Set content data.

In the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process, further, a process of transmitting an effect control command for executing a big win game effect (big hit start demo effect) to the effect control board P41 is executed. In addition, in accordance with these processes, a right-handed indicator P56, which is one of the constituent elements of the main control display device P50, indicates a game state in which a right-handed game in which a game ball is shot aiming at the right side of the game area is recommended. Setting of the lighting pattern data for lighting the LED which is lit at times is also performed.

<<Process during special symbol small hit symbol stop display>>
The special symbol small-hit symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "4: during small-hit design stop display".

As in the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process, the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process is performed with the end of the symbol fixing time, setting data related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, and turning on the right hand indicator light P56. Such setting processing is performed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, when a small winning game is executed (stop display of small winning symbols), unlike when the big winning symbols are stopped, the game state related to the special symbol lottery (high probability state or High base state) does not have processing to end, and the game state is determined based on the determination result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state, similar to the processing of the special symbol lost symbol stop display process. Control. In addition, in accordance with these processes, the special electric role product status is updated to "5: Closed for small prizes". Depending on the specifications of the game machine, as a modified example, when a small winning game is executed, the specification is designed to have a process for forcibly ending the game state (high probability state or high base state) in the same way as when the big winning pattern is stopped. is also possible.

When any one of the above sub-module processes is selectively performed, the first special symbol process is performed following the second special symbol process. Regarding the processing of the first special symbol, only the information to be referred to is different from the processing of the second special symbol (for example, regarding whether or not the fluctuation can be started, the special symbol status of the second special symbol is not the special symbol status of the first special symbol. , etc.), the description is omitted because almost the same processing is repeated.

《Entrance order digestion control, parallel control》
In addition, in the explanation of the special symbol control process described above, the explanation was based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority digestion control", but in the case of adopting a game machine specification different from the pachinko game machine on which this assumption is made. Alternatively, it is possible to proceed with the special symbol control process in a different process. A brief description of typical examples will be given below.

"Entering ball order digestion control" is a game machine specification in which the reservation information corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order of occurrence. While one pattern is fluctuating, the other is not displayed, and in a certain game state, both the reserved ball corresponding to the first special pattern and the reserved ball corresponding to the second special pattern are generated. It is a specification that is often adopted when it is expected.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol preferential digestion control" and "entering order digestion", and at the same time both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time. It is a type of game machine specification that can be used. Since two symbols can be digested at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time. In addition, when the special electric accessory P755 is activated along with the stop display of one special symbol (when a big hit or a small hit is executed), the other symbol is forcibly lost and the symbol is stopped, or the variable display is performed. A specification that suspends the subtraction of the remaining time is appropriately adopted. As an example, when one special symbol becomes a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped and displayed, and when one special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is displayed. It is possible to adopt a specification that temporarily suspends the variable display of special symbols.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
The special electric role product control process executes submodule processing related to the operation of the special electric role product P755 according to the data content (value) of the special electric role product status (sometimes referred to as the special electric role product status). This is the process of managing the operation of the object (step 2028). In other words, when executing the big winning game or the small winning game, each state in the big winning game or small winning game state is controlled, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening P751 is controlled.

As described above, the special electric role product status includes "0: Waiting for winning", "1: Special electric role item in operation", "2: Closed big prize opening", and "3: Demonstrating the end of big win". , ``4: small winning special electric is in operation'', ``5: small winning closed'', and ``6: small winning ending demonstration in progress''.

Among these special electric role product statuses, if the status is "0: Waiting for winning", it is because the player has not yet acquired the right to execute the big winning game or the small winning game by playing the game. , The special electric accessary product control process ends without performing the process.

Then, when the special electric role product status is other than "0: Waiting for winning", one of the processes described later is executed according to the status.

<<Process during operation of special electric accessories>>
Special electric auditors product in operation process is a process that is executed when the special electric auditors product status is "1: special electric auditors product in operation" or "4: small hit special electric in operation". This process is a process in a state in which a so-called round game (unit game) is being executed in a special game (a state in which the opening of the big winning opening P751 can be controlled).

In the special electric accessary product in operation process, first, a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the round game (unit game) is satisfied is performed. The conditions for ending the round game are (a) whether the specified number of winnings (also called "count") corresponding to the activated special electric accessory has been performed, or (b) the operation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed. It is determined that the opening time (opening pattern) set as has ended or has ended when either of the following is satisfied. If these conditions are not met, the special electric accessary product control process in this interrupt process is terminated without performing subsequent processes. In addition, among the operation patterns (opening patterns) of the special electric accessory P755, there is a pattern that opens and closes the big winning opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, one round While the timer used for the determination of (a) becomes "0" multiple times during the game, after confirming whether or not there is next operation data during one round game, condition (c) " If it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in the current unit game, it is determined that the above (b) is satisfied.

On the other hand, if either of the round game end conditions (a) or (b) is satisfied, as a subsequent process, the closing time of the big winning opening is stored in the closing time management timer of the special electric accessory. , the special electric role product status is incremented to be "2: Closed big prize opening". Then, the command data for notifying that the round game has ended is set as the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the process ends.

《Processing while the big winning mouth is closed》
The large winning opening closing process is a process that is executed when the special electric role product status is "2: large winning opening closed" or "5: small prize closed". This process is a process in a state of being controlled "between rounds" between so-called round games in a special game, and before the start of the first round at the start of a big win game or a small win game When the state is controlled by the state of "big win start demonstration (period)" or "minor win start demonstration (period)", or after the round game of the final round is completed, the process during the winning end demonstration, which will be described later, is executed. This is a process related to the state of being controlled during the waiting period until it becomes possible.

In the big winning opening closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening closing time set in the special electric accessory operating process has passed, and the closing time management timer is not "0", that is, the closing time If has not elapsed, the special electric accessary product control processing in this interruption is terminated.

When the closing time of the big winning opening has passed, whether the operation (round game) of the special electric role product P755 whose operation has ended first was the final round game in the current winning game (big winning game, small winning game). It is determined whether or not, and different processing is executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of the round game other than the final round (or at the time of winning start demonstration). It should be noted that, to determine whether or not it was the final round game, the cumulative data of the number of times of operation of the special electric auditors P755 operated during this winning game is the maximum number of times of operation of the special electric auditors P755 in this winning game , and the accumulated data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is "0" at the time of the winning start demonstration.

When it is determined that the final round game is finished in the processing during closing of the big winning opening, the execution pattern of the winning end demonstration according to the type of winning (the type of special symbol that started the big winning or small winning). (mainly winning end demonstration time data) is read and set. Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to set "3: big win end demonstration in progress" or "6: small win end demonstration in progress", and a production command for executing the winning end demonstration production is set in the production control board P41. to do Furthermore, in order to set the effective extension period of the big winning opening P751, the time value data determined as the effective extending period is stored in the timer that manages the effective extending period of the big winning opening P751, and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end of a game other than the final round game (or at the time of a winning start demonstration) in the processing during closing of the big winning opening, the effect control command for the effect control board P41 is issued to the effect control board P41. Information that makes it possible to identify whether there is (N round start demo command * N is an integer) and recommended firing position during winning game Sends information to instruct (right-handed command).

Then, the special electric role product status is decremented and updated to ``1: special electric role product in operation'' or ``4: small winning special electric prize in operation'', and the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening P751 during the round game. Initialize the data in the data area for counting. Then, the operation pattern data of the big winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) in the round game is set as the time value related to the first opening of the big winning opening P751 during the round game (or closing immediately after the start of the round game). and increment the data in the storage area regarding the cumulative number of operations of the special electric accessory P755.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for giving a game ball as a prize ball to the player in response to winning of a game ball in a prize winning hole arranged on the game board P5. The processing contents are configured to execute the following three sub-module processes. (Step 2030)

<<Payment data reception monitoring process>>
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of confirming the presence or absence of a control command related to execution of prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (storing) the transmitted command. . The main control board P0 stores the information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). Register 1 is called a status register, and stores information for determining whether or not there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether or not the transmitted information has been transmitted normally. It is The other register is called a data register, and stores control content information regarding payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is abnormal, the data in the data register is stored as payout control information. store in the area.

<<Payment command request processing>>
In the payout command requesting process, winning counter data for each winning opening storing data on the number of winnings of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is confirmed to confirm whether or not there is an unpaid winning. In the confirmation process, each winning hole is confirmed in a predetermined order, and if it is determined that the winning counter data for one winning hole is not "0", the number of winning balls of the corresponding winning hole , a process of transmitting a control command for executing the payout of game balls to the payout control board P43. By this process, even if the winning counter data for a plurality of winning holes is not "0", the number of payout control commands transmitted to the payout control board P43 in one interrupt is limited to one.

<<Payout command control process>>
In the payout command control process, it is checked whether or not the payout control board P43 has normally received the information regarding the number of payouts. It will happen. Until the command reception status is determined in the payout command control process (it is determined whether the command has been received normally or an error has occurred), the next payout control command transmission in the payout command request process is performed by the payout command request process. And it is temporarily interrupted by the flag data set to ON/OFF respectively in the payout command control process.

(abnormality detection processing)
The anomaly detection process is a process for confirming whether or not an anomaly has occurred based on information from a sensor provided for fraud detection in the premise pachinko game machine P. FIG. (Step 2032)

More specifically, regarding the input of sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, the magnetic sensor P73, the radio wave detection sensor P74, and the frame opening sensor P131, the occurrence of an abnormality is detected based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). This is the process of determining whether or not the In addition to the various sensors, the sensor also detects unplugged harnesses for electrical connection, short circuits on wiring, and the like.

Then, when there is abnormal data for any of the determination information, after storing the corresponding error flag to be turned on, a command for notifying the error information is set as the effect control command for the effect control board P41. do.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
In the sensor detection determination process, the period during which sensor or switch detection was continuously performed is determined from the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and the process is performed. This is processing for establishing a flag. (Step 2034)

In the sensor detection determination process, when the level data of the target sensor and switch detection data information is ON, the data for counting the continuous ON input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and various processes are executed. It is determined whether or not a start condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, a process corresponding to the switch to be monitored is executed. When the monitored switch is no longer ON data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, if the winning hole detection switch provided in the winning hole continuously detects that the switch is in the ON state, it is determined that the ball clogging has occurred, and the error state is controlled and produced. Processing of setting command information for performing error notification to the effect control board P41 as a control command, and generation and output request of signal data for notifying the occurrence of an error to an external device (hall computer, etc.).

Switches to be detected in this process include a touch sensor switch provided on the steering wheel P204 and a switch for fraud detection. It also targets sensors that require on-data input for a certain period of time.

(Game state display processing)
The game state display process is a process of generating lighting data for displaying information about the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although the name is display processing, output of display contents to the main control display device P50 is performed not by this processing but by LED output processing described later. (Step 2036)

In the premised pachinko game machine P, as an example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) indicating that it is in an error state, a special symbol hold indicator light (special figure 1 hold indicator light) that displays the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery P61, special figure 2 reservation indicator light P62), normal design reservation indicator light P63 that displays the number of reservations related to the normal design lottery, etc. are generated, and the lighting data (lighting pattern) is generated and output in the LED output process. Store.

In addition, in the game state display process, when blinking display is required for the LED indicator lights whose lighting is controlled, the lighting pattern switching process is performed by updating the display switching counter for the corresponding LED and comparing the counter value with the threshold value. done. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, the number of pending special symbol lotteries can be held up to four, but two LED indicator lights constitute a special symbol holding indicator light (special figure 1 pending indicator light P61 , Two LEDs are provided for each of the special figure 2 pending indicator lights P62), so if there are 3 or more pending numbers, at least 1 LED is not a continuous lighting display, but a blinking display. It is designed to do so.

(output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process of setting to transmit a signal related to a game operation to an electric accessory, which is an operation device on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, or to the payout control board P43. (Step 2038)

More specifically, during normal symbol control processing or during special electric auditors control processing, when the operation pattern of normal electric auditors or special electric auditors is set, by processing during output port output processing, normal electric Signal data for opening (or closing) each electric accessory is output to the accessory drive means P71 and the special electric accessory drive means P72 (solenoids in the pachinko game machine).

Also, to the payout control board P43, a control signal (shooting permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the shooting of the game ball based on the player's handle operation is generated by the output port output process and output. The output content of the launch permission signal is set according to the state of communication with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence of an error that requires the game to be stopped.

(Production control command transmission process)
The performance control command transmission process is a process of outputting a performance control command to the performance control board P41. It is a specification for transmission (step 2040). Regarding the setting of the effect control command to be transmitted, it is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted effect control command during other processing.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, a storage area called a ring buffer, which cyclically refers to a storage destination, is used as an area for storing unsent effect control commands. In the storage area called the ring buffer, in the next process called "write pointer" and "read pointer", which are updated by each process of writing (setting) the effect control command and reading (sending) the effect control command It is a specification to execute writing and reading of the effect control command using information for calculating the address of the storage area where the command is written and the address of the storage area where the command is read.

Also, in the pachinko game machine P, the configuration of the effect control command is composed of two data, MODE data indicating the type of the command and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

Returning to the description of the specific processing contents of the effect control command transmission processing, the description will be given. In the performance control command transmission process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the information of the write pointer and the read pointer match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no performance control command to be transmitted, and the processing ends. On the other hand, when the data of the write pointer and the data of the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to the next process.

When it is determined that there is a performance control command to be sent, MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, and temporarily stored in the register in the CPU of the main control board P40. After storing and clearing the effect control command in the read destination ring buffer, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value used in the next process.

As effect control commands, MODE data and EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are transmitted P41 to the effect control board in order. First, the MODE data is set to the effect command output port which is an output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the strobe signal for causing the effect control board P41 to perform the reading operation is output. The main control board P40 will subsequently output the EVENT data, but in order to ensure a sufficient period until the effect control board P41 receives the MODE data, after performing processing with a waiting time of 26 μs, the MODE data As in the case of transmission, setting of the EVENT data to the output port and output of the strobe signal are performed. When the strobe signal is confirmed, the performance control board P41 generates a performance control command reception interrupt and receives the performance control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(external information output processing)
In the external information output process, the external information output terminal 77 outputs, as a signal, information related to the game status and information related to security such as the occurrence of an error to an external device (data counter or hall computer) connected to the premised pachinko game machine P. (Step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set to the output port of the main control board P40, and when a signal output trigger occurs, it transmits a pulse signal that is ON potential for a certain period. Others continue to output an on-potential until a condition for terminating signal output is satisfied.

In the external information output process, first, a signal regarding the game state is generated. As a signal related to the game state, in order to be able to identify the type of the specific game state, in the premise pachinko game machine P, the operating state (probability state) of the probability variation function and the operating state (base state) of the electric chew support function By referring to the corresponding information and the information indicating that the special game is in progress (big win or small win), external output data is output so that the corresponding data is transmitted when each game state is controlled. Update. Note that depending on the specifications of the game machine, the output signal is generated based on information indicating whether or not there is a variable time reduction function, or information indicating that a particular type of jackpot is being won. There may be cases.

As an output signal output in the external information output process, not only a signal relating to the game state but also information based on the occurrence of a predetermined game result is output. For example, the variable display of the special pattern is executed, a signal (also referred to as a "fixed pattern signal") that is transmitted each time it is displayed stopped, and the starting port switch (special 1 starting port switch P712, special 2 starting port switch 722) or the big winning opening switch P752, or every time a game ball is detected entering each winning opening, or the payout of winning balls based on the winning balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). Each time, data is set in the external output data, and there is a signal that is transmitted to the external device. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and a signal of 1 is transmitted as a pulse signal with a continuous ON potential of 128 ms. After the output of the pulse signal is finished, the pulse signal is output again after outputting an off-potential for a certain period of time.

In the external signal output process, the data in the storage area storing the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the abnormality detection process (step 2032) and comparison data for confirming whether or not an error requiring security notification has occurred. are calculated and compared, and if it is determined that a security signal needs to be output, the output data to be set to the output port is updated so as to turn on the bit corresponding to the security signal in the external output data.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the game progress and game status. (Step 2044)

The LEDs that make up the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol holding indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), the second Special symbol holding indicator P62 (2 LEDs), normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), normal symbol holding indicator P63 (2 LEDs), round indicator P54, status indicator P55, right-handed indicator (total It has a total of 32 LED display units (8 LEDs).

In addition, the state indicator light P55 is a collective representation of indicator lights related to a plurality of game states, and in detail, a special figure probability variation indicator light indicating whether the probability variation function is operating or not, and the operation of the normal symbol probability variation function It refers to indicator lights such as the normal map probability indicator light that indicates the presence or absence (whether or not the electric chew support function is activated), and the error indicator light that indicates the error state.

In the LED output process, 1 byte of the lighting data for the display section of the main control display device is set to the output port for each interrupt processing to light the main control display device P50, and the main control display device P50 is updated for each interrupt processing. LEDs of the main control display device P50 to be lit by this interruption are selected based on the value of the digit counter, lighting pattern data corresponding to the gaming situation is selected, and set as display data to control the lighting of each LED. It's like

That is, in the premised pachinko game machine P, the main control display device P50 is used for 32 LEDs, and the main control display device P50 is operated by a dynamic lighting method in which lighting data is output in order using at least four interrupt processes. controlling.

In addition, in the LED output process, in addition to the LED display to be visually recognized by the player as the main control display device P50, lighting control is performed only when the game stop flag is in a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or an unrecoverable error state. It also controls the lighting of the LED display.

Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P on which the assumption is made, if the game stop flag stores a flag indicating some kind of game stop state, the setting of the lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. , during setting change, during setting confirmation, and during an unrecoverable error, the LEDs constituting the main control display device are all extinguished. As a modification, when the game stop flag is set, light emission may be displayed using a fixed lighting pattern set for each state. For example, the main control display device P50 may be configured to light up all the LEDs constituting the .

(Outside area control processing)
Out-of-area control processing includes test signal output processing for outputting signals used for testing pachinko gaming machines (processing for outputting signals used for testing pachinko gaming machines) and performance display device display. It is configured by a process for controlling (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" is that it is a process executed by a program in a storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area stipulated by the pachinko game machine rules.

In the test signal output process, a process of setting information relating to the game result and game state to the output port from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko game machine P to an external test device is performed. In the performance display process, the game state is confirmed, the number of out balls and the ratio (base) of the number of out balls and the number of prize balls are calculated, updated as display data, and displayed on the performance display device P59. This is the process of outputting.

[Special design lottery]
Next, the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. FIG. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of "win/fail lottery", "hit symbol lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery".

(Lottery drawing)
The "win or fail lottery" is a lottery that determines whether or not the special electric accessory P755 will be activated based on the result of the executed special symbol lottery. , "big win", "minor win", or "lose". Depending on the specifications of the pachinko game machine P, there are some machines that do not have a "minor win" as a lottery result of the winning lottery. In addition, when configured to have the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it has a "small hit" as the lottery result of the win or lose lottery for one special symbol, and the lottery result of the other win or fail lottery is "small hit". It may be configured so as not to have "hit".

Win/fail lottery uses a random number called a "win/fail random number" out of the random numbers acquired and stored when a game ball enters the starting port (first starting winning port P711, second starting winning port P721, etc.). lottery. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the range of possible random numbers (random number range) of the success/fail random number is 65536 from "0" to "65535", which is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When a lottery is performed, the result of the lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number with a lottery table (called a "lottery table") used for the lottery according to the game state and set values. process.

FIG. 10 illustrates several lottery tables used for lottery. FIG. 10(A) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value of "1" and a low probability state, and FIG. 10(B) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value of "1" and a high probability state. (C) and (D) of FIG. 10 respectively show win/fail lottery tables in a low probability state and a high probability state when the set value is "6".

For example, in the situation of executing the lottery lottery using the lottery table of FIG. Assuming that the numerical value is "1500", the flow of the lottery will be explained.

First, it is determined whether or not it belongs to the jackpot random number range ("0" to "327") as the result of the first lottery. Specifically, the process of subtracting the random number value range "328" of the big hit to be determined from the random number value "1500" of the hit/fail random number of this time is performed. At this time, the result of the subtraction is "1172", which is not a negative value. Therefore, it is determined that the hit/fail random number of this time does not belong to the big hit random number range.

As a subsequent process, the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous big hit judgment is compared with the random number range ("328" to "65370") as the determination area for the success or failure lottery result of the success or failure lottery table. . More specifically, the random value range "65043" to be determined is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the hit/fail random number. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, information corresponding to the result of "lost" is stored as the result of the lottery.

Hypothetically, if a special symbol lottery is performed in a high probability state with respect to this random number "1500", the lottery will be made on the win/fail lottery table shown in FIG. Determine whether it belongs to the range (“0” to “1639”). At this time, the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the hit/fail random number and the random value range is a negative value, so the result of the hit/fail lottery is determined to be a "big win".

The pachinko machine P, which is the premise, adopts a method of judging the lottery result by sequentially comparing the data obtained as random numbers and the random number range according to the lottery result of the lottery table. The same lottery method is adopted for the winning pattern lottery and the fluctuation pattern lottery, which will be described later. In addition, the lottery method is not limited to the above example, and a method of directly determining whether or not the obtained random number matches the random number that will be the big hit may be adopted. may be employed.

(Hit design lottery)
"Hit symbol lottery" receives the lottery result of the special symbol lottery described above, the control contents related to the operation of the subsequent special electric accessory P755, and the lottery table of the fluctuation pattern lottery described later (see FIGS. 12 to 14) ) is the process of determining the stop display design of the special design as the lottery result necessary for switching.

FIG. 11 shows a jackpot pattern lottery table (see FIG. 11A) used in the winning pattern lottery when the lottery result is "big hit", and when the lottery result is "small hit". , a small winning symbol lottery table (see FIG. 11 (B)) used in the winning symbol lottery, and a losing symbol lottery table (Fig. 11 ( C)) is shown.

The "symbol random number" used in the winning symbol lottery has a random value range of "1000" ("0" to "999"). 0” to “3”, and the lower 1 byte is represented by “0” to “255”.

To explain the winning symbol lottery with a specific example, for example, when the winning lottery result is a big hit, the first special when the symbol random number is "400" (the upper byte is "1" and the lower byte is "144"). In the case of the winning pattern lottery for the pattern, using the lottery table of the upper 1 byte "1" shown in FIG. is obtained as a result of the lottery, and when the special symbols are changed and displayed, the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device P52) is stopped.

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, the jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is executed. At this time, when "5R probability variation 2" is displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device, and when "5R probability variation 1" is displayed as a stop display symbol, each of the 5 rounds of the jackpot game. The content of the round game (opening pattern and opening time of the big winning hole P751, etc.) may be varied based on the stop display pattern, and control may be performed to vary the control content in the specific game state that shifts after the jackpot game. It is possible. These jackpot games and control assignments in the specific game state are appropriately determined in order to realize game performance according to the specifications of each pachinko game machine P, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Incidentally, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, the lottery shown in FIG. After determining the type of jackpot such as 5R probability variable 2", the type of jackpot is determined by performing another lottery from a plurality of patterns to determine the stop display pattern for executing the jackpot of the corresponding type. , and determination of the symbols to be displayed to be stopped, and the winning symbol lottery may be executed in two stages.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P as a premise, as shown in FIG. , the types of winning symbols that can be determined are different. More specifically, in the premised pachinko gaming machine P, the possibility of determining "10R probability variation 5" to "10R probability variation 8" is increasing in the second special symbol jackpot, and the first special symbol It can be said that it is easier to win a big win with a large number of rounds than a winning symbol lottery, and it is easy to win a big win that shifts to a high probability / high base state as a specific game state.

FIG. 11B illustrates a small winning symbol lottery table. The small winning symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery success or failure lottery is "small win", and the lottery method is the above-mentioned big winning symbol lottery table. is similar to

In the small winning symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11 (B), most of them are winning the "small winning 1" symbol, and when the second special symbol lottery result is "small winning". , a "small hit 2" can be determined. It should be noted that one type of small winning pattern may be used, or three or more types of patterns may be determined.

As an example of the purpose of providing a plurality of small winning symbols like the pachinko game machine P that is the premise, the number of game balls that can be obtained by simply changing the opening mode of the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game For example, in a pachinko game machine P that adopts a small win V as a game machine specification (spec), to separate a small win game that is easy to win a V in a specific area and a small win game that makes it difficult to win a V. The purpose is to execute a mode such as differentiating the small winning patterns and differentiating the small winning patterns in order to separate the type of the specific game to be shifted after the execution of the big winning game after winning the V prize.

FIG. 11(C) illustrates a lost symbol lottery table. The lost symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery lottery is "lost", and the method of lottery is the jackpot symbol lottery described above with respect to the first special symbol. It is the same as the time of the table, and has a different method for the second special symbol.

More specifically, FIG. 11(C) shows only the winning symbol lottery table for the first special symbol. Only in this case, lottery processing is performed, and either "lose 1" or "lose 2" is determined as the stop display symbol.

The "lost 2" pattern is a winning design with a probability of about 6.4% when the 1st special pattern is lost. A special lottery table (not shown) is referred to to facilitate determination of the variation pattern (variation time). For this reason, "losing 2" may be referred to as "reaching loosing pattern" or the like.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, does not have a winning symbol lottery table for the second special symbol, and is designed to determine a winning symbol of 1 regardless of the random number of symbols. The table comparison process itself is omitted, and one missing pattern is stored. It should be noted that it is also possible to use a lottery table that always wins one symbol so that a winning symbol is won.

(fluctuation pattern lottery)
The "fluctuation pattern lottery" is a process of randomly determining the fluctuation display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed. In the premised pachinko game machine P, a special pattern lottery is used as the performance time required for notifying the performance display device P80 whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and what the type of the jackpot is in the case of a big win. is determined using a variation pattern table, which will be described later.

FIG. 12 mainly shows a normal game state (low probability/low base medium) and a low base state (non-electric chew support state), that is, in the premise pachinko game machine P, a game ball is shot to the left area P501L of the game board. It represents the “low base medium fluctuation pattern lottery table” in which it is recommended that

The "ID" shown in FIG. 12 represents information stored as a result of the variation pattern lottery, and the "variation pattern" is displayed on the effect display device P80 when the same ID is won. It shows a representative example of the mode of production of variation. "Variation time" is the variation display time value of the special symbol in the target variation pattern lottery result (variation pattern ID), and represents the time from when the special symbol is variably displayed to when it is stopped.

"Holding 1 fluctuation" to "Holding 4 fluctuation" in FIG. Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is N, the fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of "Hold N fluctuation". That is, the variation pattern lottery for the first special symbols in the low base state is configured to vary the variation pattern table to be used depending on the number of reservations. It should be noted that, when the game ball enters the start winning hole in the state where there is no suspension, it is temporarily stored as suspension for processing, so the variation pattern lottery is executed using the variation pattern table of "Hold 1 variation". be.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of reservations, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of reservations. It should be noted that, although not shown, as a result of the pattern lottery, if "missing 2 (reaching lost pattern)" is determined, even if it is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, 1 variation that does not depend on the number of reservations It is configured to perform a variation pattern lottery using a pattern table (fluctuation pattern table for loss 2).

"10R probability variation", "5R probability variation", "10R normal", and "5R normal" in FIG. is a "big hit", and represents that the lottery is performed by appropriately selecting the variation pattern table according to which symbol the symbol lottery result is. In FIG. 12, since the second special symbol is not the subject of the game in the low base state, the big hit variation pattern table is expressed so as to be determined in a form independent of the big hit symbol, but the big hit of the second special symbol is also expressed. , and may have a plurality of patterns according to the type of the jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the variation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described with reference to FIG. As a specific example, it is a lottery of the first special symbol, the situation where the variation pattern random number is "30000" and the number of pending balls at the start of variation is 3 (situation where the number of pending is 2 after the start of variation). I will explain the situation where the winning or losing lottery result and the winning symbol lottery are "lose 1".

First, since the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table of "maintain 3 fluctuation" is used. The lottery process compares (subtracts) the variation pattern random number and the random number range corresponding to the variation pattern ID of each lottery result, similarly to the lottery process in the winning lottery described above, and determines whether the random number belongs to the same range. do. By performing this process, at the timing of normal fluctuation B of ID "2", the result of repeating the comparison operation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random value range becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as a fluctuation pattern lottery, special After the variation display for 7 seconds is performed as the symbol variation display, the missing symbol 1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device P51.

Next, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be explained using FIG. The configuration of the variation pattern table in the high base state has a configuration that is the same as the variation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. It is constructed so as to have a table and a table for each jackpot pattern at the time of jackpot. Although FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 are configured so that many fluctuation patterns can be determined in common, this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and is determined by the low base state and the high base state. It is also possible to configure such that the variation patterns overlap only a few times or do not overlap at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, the lottery result of the second special symbol "H3 fluctuation" and "H4 fluctuation" at the time of loss is the shortest fluctuation time of the pachinko game machine P that is assumed. A 2-second variation (variation pattern ID “12”) is configured to be determinable.

Furthermore, as a characteristic point of the variation pattern in the high base state, the 10-second variation of the variation pattern ID "4" is always determined for the lottery of the first special symbol. The reason for configuring the first special symbol with a variation of 10 seconds is that the player's profit in the case of a big hit is large in the big hit symbol lottery table shown in FIG. This is due to the fact that there are many jackpot patterns that shift to the probability fluctuation state as the specific game state), and by performing a large number of variable displays corresponding to the second special pattern with priority, the jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. is intended to make it possible to obtain In addition, even if there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage between the first special symbol and the second special symbol jackpot game, the first special symbol is based on the fact that the second special symbol priority digestion control is adopted. It is easy to hold the hold established in the normal game state (low base state) until the end of the specific game state (high base state), which is an advantageous state, to avoid the variable display. Another object is to avoid requiring a large amount of game balls to cause the first special symbol hold in the low base state, relative to the amount of game balls used to generate the special symbol hold.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special table for a limited period, representing a special variation pattern table that is referred to during a specific period. In FIG. 14, as an example of a special variation pattern table provided in the pachinko game machine P as a premise, special variation pattern tables for three periods are comprehensively described.

More specifically, FIG. 14 shows the period from the 1st to the 4th fluctuation after the big hit (so-called "retained ream" (retained ream), which is a big hit with 4 holds that exist at the time of the big win). period), and the reach variation of 55 seconds, which is referred to in the n-th to m-th variation after the big hit, is likely to be selected. Referred to in the high frequency reach table (IDs "52", "53", "54", "72") and the last variable display in the high base state, the "result effect" described later is mainly executed. It is shown that a different "result variation table" (for IDs "55" and "73") is provided in the premise pachinko game machine P.

Such a special variation pattern table that is referenced for a limited period of time is called a "special variation pattern table" or a "limited frequency (pattern table)".

In the premise pachinko game machine P, the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referred to during a predetermined period after the jackpot game (operation of the special electric role product, in other words, operation of the role product continuous operation device). doing. Regarding these reference periods, it is possible to change whether or not to refer to them depending on the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern). It is also possible to configure them differently. What kind of special variation pattern table to refer to in what situation can be appropriately set for each pachinko game machine, and the details are not limited to the examples, and if necessary, the details can be explained in a separate description. and

Next, the control of the effect control board P41 that performs control related to the effect operation in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, will be described. The operation control of the performance control board P41 is less restricted in the model test of the game machine, and has a higher degree of freedom in design than the control of the main control board P40, so it will be explained in the following explanation. It is not limited only to the processing, and the timing at which the processing is performed can also be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of production control board to main loop processing]
In the premise pachinko game machine P, power-on processing (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41 when the power of the game machine is turned on. Here, details of power-on processing of the effect control board P41 will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) is started in the effect control board P41 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the initial setting process relating to the operation of the CPU, which is the arithmetic device provided on the effect control board P41, is performed. (Step 4002). The initial setting process is to appropriately perform settings necessary for the operation of the CPU thereafter, and details thereof will be omitted. There is a time lag between the completion of the power-on processing (Fig. 7) and the power-on processing of the effect control board (Fig. 15). Since there is a risk of deviation, in the initial processing of the effect control board P41 at the time of power failure recovery, the effect information etc. are often initialized so that the effect that was being executed before the power failure is not executed ("effect called “control board reset” and “sub-reset”).

(Main loop of production control board)
In the premise pachinko game machine P, the main loop process is performed after the initial setting process. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is set so that the cycle (frame) for drawing the effect image is drawn 30 times per second. Since the cycle is set to approximately 33 ms (30 FPS), the main loop processing loop is performed once at a cycle of 16 ms, which is approximately half the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

In the main loop processing of the effect control board P41, clear processing of the watchdog timer for detecting runaway of the CPU is first performed (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process of updating the effect control random number data (step 4006) is performed, and various effect control random numbers used when an opportunity to execute the effect lottery occurs are updated.

Next, input port monitoring processing is executed (step 4008). The pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, is designed to monitor the input port even during the interrupt processing of the effect control board P41, which will be described later. Therefore, monitoring of inputs such as switches, which are necessary monitoring objects in the system, is limited, and monitoring of inputs such as sensors necessary for controlling the effect of the effect movable accessory P560 is omitted. As a modified example, sensors to be monitored for performance may be checked in the input port monitoring process in the main loop process.

The contents of the input port monitoring process are the same as the input port confirmation process of the main control board, from the input data of various sensors, level data is generated and stored, and rising (falling) data is stored. be done.

Subsequently, the effect control board P41 performs effect device control processing (step 4010), and executes control related to effect operations other than the effect display device P80 (image display). The production devices controlled in this process include lamps P82 ("board lamp (P550)" and "frame lamp (P350)"), speakers P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production movable accessories P560, and the like. An effect operation command corresponding to the content of the effect decided to be executed by a process such as the effect control process (step 4012), which will be described later, is transmitted to each effect device to execute the effect operation.

This is because the output of the effect operation commands to various effect devices in the effect device control process (step 4010) must be executed (started) in synchronization with the effect image displayed on the effect display device P80 (image display device). , the signal transmitted at regular intervals from the image control board P42 controlling the effect display device P80 to the effect control board P41 or the signal for forcibly synchronizing is received (the input port monitoring process described above). ), it synchronizes with the effect switching timing of the effect display device P80, and outputs the effect operation command to various effect devices.

In addition, regarding the operation control of the effect movable accessory P560 among the effect devices, it is necessary to control the driving means of the effect movable accessory P560 in a shorter period, so the effect set in this process Regarding the operation pattern of the effect movable accessory P560 to be executed by the operation command, sensor monitoring and operation switching are executed even during an interrupt process (see FIG. 16) of the effect control board P41, which will be described later.

Next, the effect control processing (step 4012) executed in the main loop processing of the effect control board P41 will be described. Effect control processing is based on the result of analyzing the effect control command received from the main control board P40 in the effect control command analysis process to be described later, and the information of the received effect control command itself (such as the lottery result ID of the special symbol lottery) ), input port monitoring processing (step 4008), interrupt processing (FIG. 16), etc., based on the flags established during other processing, lottery or selection processing to determine the contents of the presentation to be executed by various presentation devices. is.

The effect control process selects the effect determination process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes the corresponding effect determination submodule process. As an example of the production content determined here, the process of determining the variation production corresponding to the variation of one special symbol based on the command (win/fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command) related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery (processing to determine the content of notices, reach, and decorative patterns to be stopped), and pre-reading performance (" Based on the information sent as a production control command when executing a pre-reading lottery process that determines whether or not to execute a special game (big hit or small hit), the content of the production during the special game is determined. There is a special game effect content determination process and the like.

In addition, the effect control process is not only the process for the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, but also the determination process of the error display content when an error is detected by the effect control board P41 (error transmitted from the main control board). (including determination processing of error display content based on information), adjustment of the volume output from the speaker P83 based on the player's input operation such as the effect button P381 and the cross key P383 which are the effect operation means P81, and the lamp P82 It also executes the determination of the effect contents such as the light amount adjustment for changing the light emission luminance of the display and the customization of the effect contents and the effect content determination tendency.

It should be noted that the processing for determining the contents of various effects performed in the sub-module processing called in the effect control process is often subject to the invention, since the specifications unique to each gaming machine are often used. When the pachinko game machine P executes a characteristic process, the details will be explained in the explanation of the embodiment of the pachinko game machine P which is the object of the invention.

Returning to the description of the main loop processing of the effect control board, the effect control command analysis processing (step 4014) will be described as the last processing of the main loop processing.

The effect control command analysis process is based on the information stored as the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40. and set flags. In this process, it is necessary to determine the processing contents according to the command transmitted from the main control board P40. process is executed.

Since there is a possibility that one command (MODE data and EVENT data) will be transmitted for each interrupt processing (every 4 ms) of the main control board P40, the effect control command can Until the period (16 ms) of the main loop processing of the substrate P41 elapses, the analysis of the effect control command is repeatedly executed as long as it can be processed (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of production control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41 will be described. Interrupt processing in the effect control board P41, unlike the interrupt processing of the main control board, has a plurality of interrupt processing that is started at different execution timing (see Figure 16 (A) and (B)). In addition, priority is set for these multiple interrupt processes, and if an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, even if the interrupt process is being executed, the higher interrupt process will be executed. controlled by In this description, the production control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16(A)) and the production control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)) will be described as representatives.

(Production control timer interrupt processing)
Effect control timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16(A)) is interrupt processing executed at a 1 ms cycle in the CPU of the effect control board P41.

Port input/output processing (step 5002) is input from the input port of the effect control board P41 to the sensor provided for detecting the position of the effect movable accessory P560 and other sensors (input sensor of the effect operation means P81). From the output port, the drive means (solenoid, stepping motor, etc.) of the movable accessory P560 is driven according to the operation pattern set in the production device control process. A process for outputting a signal is executed. Also, when data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) for counting the number of times of output is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer for measuring the switching timing of the effect operation. When the update processing for each timer is completed, a comparison operation is performed with a comparison value, and it is determined whether or not the switching condition for the performance operation has occurred, and information necessary for determining the content of the performance in the performance control processing (step 4012) A process for storing the flag in the storage area is performed.

The sensor monitoring process (step 5006) is based on sensor detection data generated in the port input/output process to obtain sensor detection information related to the switching of the effect operation, such as whether or not the condition for switching the effect operation of the effect movable accessory P560 is met. is determined, and processing for switching the operation pattern table is performed, and processing for setting a condition flag for determining the content of the performance in the performance control processing (step 4012) is performed.

The effect button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process for judging whether or not the effect switching condition is established based on the inputs of the effect button P381, the lever P382, the cross key P383, etc., which are the effect operation means P81. In the effect button monitoring process, the level data indicating the input state of each input device generated in the port input/output process (step 5002) and the rising data (data indicating that the level data has changed from OFF last time to ON this time) are used to generate effects. It determines whether or not the operating means P81 is operated and how it is operated.

For example, when start-up data is generated as input information for the effect operating means P81, it is assumed that the player has operated the effect operating means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding effect is stored. . In addition, if the input is judged only by the rise data, there is a possibility that the effect operation will be switched due to erroneous detection due to electrical noise. It may be determined that the player's operation (sometimes expressed as "single push (single pull) operation" or "single blow operation") on the effect operation means P81 is triggered by the continuation.

Further, when the ON input level data is continuously detected 500 times, that is, when it is determined that the effect operation means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined as a "long press (long draw)" operation, It is configured to handle as a special operation. In addition, the falling data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous ON to the current OFF) may be electrically detected as noise when judging whether or not there is a "long press (long pull)" operation. , In this case as well, similar to the measures to prevent false detection described above, after detection of falling data, based on the detection of input of level data (off data) multiple times, input of "long press (long draw)" operation It is also possible to determine the end.

Then, in the premised pachinko game machine P, depending on the content of the effect being executed, the effect operation means is executed once at a constant cycle (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by executing the "long press" operation on the effect button P381. It is possible to repeat the processing that assumes that there is a "single press (single pull)" input operation on P81. Execution of repetitive processing assuming that a "single-press" operation has been performed is called an "automatic repeated-press" operation. It should be noted that the "automatic repeated hitting" operation is not limited to the operation content illustrated, but by operating a plurality of effect operation means P81 at the same time or by turning on and off a DIP switch provided as a switch different from the effect button, It is also possible to adopt a method of assuming that the "automatic repeated hitting" operation has been executed based on the input of the effect button P381.

Note that the input to the effect operation means P81 has a period treated as a valid operation (“operation valid period”) and a period treated as an invalid operation (“operation invalid period”) depending on the execution status of the effect.

Multi-task processing (step 5010), depending on the value of the task counter (updated between the value "0" ~ "15") that is updated each time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, effect control generated this time This is a process performed by changing the contents of the process to be executed during the timer interrupt process. The task counter is configured to circulate at a cycle of 16 ms, and the processing for each counter value is executed substantially in synchronization with one cycle of the main loop processing. As an example of processing in each task, whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed is determined based on a signal (input information is generated by port input/output processing) transmitted from the image control board P42, and the image is displayed. A process of monitoring the operation status of the control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) sends an image control command ("inter-sub command") to the CPU of the image control board P42 so as to execute an image display corresponding to the content of the effect determined in the effect control process P41. ) to the CPU of the image control board P42. Although the image control board P42 and the performance control board P41 may be configured by the same board, they are referred to as the image control board P42 for the sake of convenience in this specification.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the effect control board P41 consists of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command designating the pattern of the display content as the image control command. It is configured to send.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is assumed, is configured to transmit image control commands in the effect control timer interrupt process. It is also possible to configure such that transmission and reception are performed by providing interrupt processing.

(Production control command reception interrupt)
In the effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)), a strobe signal is output in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040) in the interrupt process (FIG. 9) of the main control board P40, and the strobe signal is transmitted to the effect control board. This is an interrupt process that occurs when P41 receives.

When the effect control command reception interrupt is started, the effect control board P41 reads the effect control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, and updates and stores the temporary buffer data (step 5502, step 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data ends, it is determined whether or not the reception of one effect control command (a combination of MODE data and EVENT data) has been completed (step 5506). It should be noted that the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40 has specific bits of "1" and "0" in the 1-byte data.

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, processing is performed to store the content of the effect control command received this time in the normal lower 1-byte storage area. At this time, if the part of the specific bit in the lower 1-byte storage area of the current temporary buffer data before update indicates that it is MODE data, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1-byte storage area. After that, the EVENT data received this time is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

Then, in the determination of completion of reception of the effect control command in step 5506, it is determined whether or not a specific bit in the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is data indicating EVENT data, and it is determined that it is EVENT data. In the case, the reception of the effect control command of 1 is completed (step 5506 YES) and proceeds to the next process, and when it is determined that it is MODE data (step 5506 NO), the transmission of EVENT data from the main control board P40 Until receiving the strobe signal based on, it exits the effect control command reception interrupt, performs other processing and waits.

In step 5506, when it judges that reception of the production|presentation control command was completed, it judges whether the sent production|presentation control command was normal (step 5508). This process is determined, for example, based on whether or not matching data exists in the list data of the effect control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. Then, when it is determined that the command is normal, it is stored in a storage area for storing the effect control command received so as to be analyzed by the effect control command analysis process during the effect control timer interrupt process, In the case of abnormal data, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Example of basic image display effects]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the basic effects in the pachinko game machine P as a premise will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (during display of decorative symbols stopped) during normal game (during low probability/low base), and FIG. It is a figure showing the situation where it is. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 20 shows a game performance during operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). It is a diagram of

(Example of effect display in normal game state)
《Decorative pattern》
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (decorative symbols are stopped) during a normal game (during low probability/low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in such a manner that the player can clearly see them. These three patterns are called "decorative patterns (P801)" (also called "design"), and are dramatic display items displayed corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and the fluctuation of the special patterns. The display is changed according to the display. Although only numbers are shown in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decoration image such as a character image. Also, in the case where each number is displayed with a decoration image, the display mode of the decoration image and each number may be changed according to the game state. Such a configuration makes it easier for the player to determine the current game state.

The decorative pattern P801 is variably displayed as one effect for one variable display of the special pattern (one special pattern lottery), except when a special effect is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative pattern P801 is variably displayed, the decorative pattern is variably displayed at high speed (transparent display or non-display depending on the case), and animation and production effect images are displayed. By the production called "notice", the production that raises the expectation of acquiring the right of the big hit game is performed.

The decorative pattern P801 shown in FIG. 17 is displayed by scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) when the variable display is started, and then the left pattern (P801a), the right pattern (P801c), and the middle pattern (P801b) in this order. The stop display symbols determined by the effect control board P41 are stopped and displayed for each symbol row. Generally, when the three decorative patterns P801 are stop-displayed in the same manner (zoroshi), a big hit is reported in a dramatic manner. In addition, while one symbol is displayed in a variable manner, other symbols are displayed. The state in which the right and left symbols are displayed in the same pattern (temporary stop display) is called "reach" ("reach state", "reach mode").

The variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a form of scroll display in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the form of the variable display is not limited to the vertical direction, and can be scrolled forward and backward using the horizontal direction and depth ( It is also possible to perform a scroll display operation in a diagonal direction, or to perform a rotation operation on the spot without scrolling and to switch the display in order.

Also, the decorative symbol P801 may be stopped and displayed a plurality of times during one time of variable display of the special symbol. At this time, when the stop display is performed a plurality of times, the stop display showing the result of the special lottery is a stop display displayed at the same timing as the stop display pattern of the special pattern is stop-displayed on the special pattern display device. A stop display at a timing other than this is called a "temporary stop (display)." In addition, the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display at the same time may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern P801 is not completely fixed in order to distinguish it from the final stop display of the pattern (main stop). It is configured to rotate, move in directions such as up and down or left and right, and swing around one rotation axis. Such a state may be expressed as "shaking fluctuation" in addition to temporary stop.

After the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display may be repeated again, and generally, the re-fluctuation from the state where the symbols other than the jackpot pattern are temporarily stopped is called a "pseudo-variation (pseudo-run)" effect. , The re-fluctuation that may change the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot pattern is stopped is called "promotion (fluctuation)" effect. In addition, when the promotion performance is executed, it may be configured not to change to a jackpot pattern that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot pattern, or to not change to a losing pattern.

In addition, when the decorative pattern P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a kind of special decorative pattern that is not displayed during normal variable display and is displayed only when a part of the effect is executed. (P804)” (special symbol). The special design has a meaning in each pattern, for example, suggesting that a specific jackpot will be executed, suggesting that the above-mentioned pseudo-fluctuation effect will be performed, or a specific reach effect (reach mode) Examples include those that suggest that the advance notice effect displayed in the case) will be executed. When a special symbol is used, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as the decoration symbol (middle symbol P801b) to be temporarily stopped at the end. A special pattern may be temporarily stopped as a decorative pattern.

《Simple layout (mini layout)》
Three numbers displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern P801 are displayed on the upper right of the screen. This design is also called "simple design (P802)"("simpledesign") or "mini design", and shows the lottery result of the special design according to the variable display of the special design, similar to the above-mentioned "decorative design". Displayed as a display object.

Unlike the "decorative design", the simple design P802 (mini design) is different from the "decorative design". In accordance with the display on the display devices P51 and P52, one stop display is always performed for one special symbol lottery.

In addition, the variable display of the simple design P802 may be configured to form the same ready-to-win state when the decorative pattern P801 described above is in the ready-to-win state, or to notify the result of the special design lottery. In order to achieve the minimum purpose, it is possible to adopt a simple variable display method such as performing constant display switching until the variable display of the special symbol is in a stopped display state regardless of the decorative symbol P801. good.

《Reserved display area》
A pending display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. In the reserved display area P810, a reserved object P811 corresponding to the reserved (random number) corresponding to the unexercised right is displayed as the special symbol lottery right acquired by the player. The example of FIG. 17 shows a state in which three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 17, the earlier the execution time of the special symbol lottery is (that is, the earlier the hold is), the closer the position is to the center of the lower part of the screen, and the hold display area P810. The display position of the reserved object located on the rightmost side of the screen is called "H1 (display area)", and as it goes to the left side of the screen, it is "H2 (display area)", "H3 (display area)", and "H4 ( display area)”.

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the reserved display area P810, an object having substantially the same form as the reserved object P811 of the reserved display area P810 is displayed at a higher position and larger in size than the reserved object P811. This display area continues to display the pending display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the current special symbol variable display from the pending display area, and is called the "variable object display area (P812)". . In addition, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is called "the variable object (P813)", but it may also be called "the pending display", and is differentiated from the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810. Therefore, the acronym “applicable” is used.

The display mode of the changing object P813 in the changing object display area P812 does not have to be completely the same as that of the suspended object P811. In some cases, the shape may change or disappear (hidden). Further, the variable object P813 may also be configured so that the display mode can be changed in the same way as the pending display in the pending change look-ahead described later (for example, the shape and color of the object change at the timing during the variable display). ).

《Simple hold display》
Two numbers are displayed side by side in the vertical direction at the substantially central position in the height direction on the left side of the screen. These two numbers represent the current number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols, and are called "simple reserved display (P814)". In the example in FIG. 17, the reserved number of the first special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "3" displayed above, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "4" displayed below. .

(Look-ahead effect)
《Pending change lookahead》
Also, in FIG. 17, the reserved object P811 in the H3 display area in the reserved display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the reserved objects P811 in the H2 and H1 display areas. The premise pachinko game machine P is configured such that the display mode of the 3rd retained object P811 has a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the display mode of the 2nd retained object P811. In this way, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending object P811 and displaying it for a specific pending is called "holding change (prefetching)".

It should be noted that it is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. may be changed.

In addition, not limited to "suspension change (prefetch)", when it is determined that the random value stored as suspension is to be executed, the variable display corresponding to the suspension that is the execution target of the production is started. The production that suggests that there is a high possibility that the pending jackpot, which is the target of execution of the production ahead of time, is called the “pre-reading production” (sometimes referred to as the “pre-judgment production”). I'm in.

Then, when executing the "prefetching effect", the hold determined as the hold that is the execution target of the effect may be referred to as "prefetch target hold", "trigger hold", "criminal hold", etc. , The variable display of special symbols based on prefetch target suspension is referred to as "prefetch target variation", "trigger variation", "culprit variation", and the like.

Here, some representative examples that can be adopted in the premise pachinko game machine P are exemplified as "prefetching effect".

《Foresight of Opportunity》
"Chance eye look-ahead" is the variation display of the decorative symbols P801 until the variation of the look-ahead target variation is started. It is a production that will be done. As an example of the rule of the stop display mode of the decorative pattern P801 predetermined as the chance eye, (a) when the winning pattern is stopped by combining only the patterns with the same hue of the numerical portion of the decorative pattern, (b) When displayed in a regular stop display mode such as ``1'', ``2'', ``3'', ``5'', ``4'', ``3'', etc. (c) A special number such as "7" or a pattern different from a number such as "first" is stop-displayed as a medium-sized stop display pattern.

《Direction movable role-reading》
"Effective movable accessory look-ahead" reads ahead the effective movable accessory P560 or the frame movable accessory P360 (such as the lever P382 of the premise pachinko game machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3). This is an effect that makes a lively action from the start of the change until the change display of the target change starts or straddles the look-ahead target change according to the effect operation pattern.

《Zone Transition Look Ahead》
"Zone transition look-ahead" moves to a special production mode (called "zone") in the variable display of special symbols before the look-ahead target variation starts, and until the look-ahead target variation is displayed, special This is a look-ahead effect suggesting that the possibility of a big win is high by executing a notice lottery for executing a notice effect corresponding to a special effect mode. For example, "normal background display -> look-ahead background display -> big hit", or "normal background display -> look-ahead background display -> winning pattern stops and returns to normal background".

(Display example when executing reach effect)
Next, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of a big hit is being performed. As described above, the "ready-to-win effect" is a situation in which decorative patterns (left pattern P801a, right pattern P801c) other than one decorative pattern (middle pattern P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and one more pattern is displayed. It means an effect in a state in which it is announced that a big win will be achieved if the game is stopped in the same mode.

In many cases, the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, has a specification for notifying a big hit by displaying three decorative patterns P801 in the same stop display mode via a ready-to-win effect.

In the example of FIG. 18, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c of the decorative patterns are displayed as "5", and "4", "5", and "6" are displayed as the patterns in the middle pattern row during fluctuation. It shows a situation in which the "4" symbol vibrates violently, and if it switches to "5", it will be a big hit.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the left and right decorative symbols "5" are displayed in a smaller size than the decorative symbols P801 during stop display in FIG. The row decorative pattern P801b is displayed in a larger size than the decorative pattern P801 during stop display, and is highlighted. At this time, the decorative symbols displayed in small sizes corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c may be called "retreat symbol (P803)" or "reach symbol". In the ready-to-win effect, in addition to the example shown in the figure, whether or not a big hit will be announced depending on how the animation of the advance notice effect (ready-to-win effect) displayed with the variable display of the decorative pattern will end. In some cases, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c, which have already been temporarily stopped and displayed, are displayed (or hidden) in a reduced size in the retracted pattern P803 so as to enhance the visibility of the effect that the player wants to pay attention to. ing.

Also, there is a game machine that does not display three decorative symbols P801, and there is also a multi-line reach that simultaneously forms a reach mode of multiple lines, but the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the ready-to-win effect, there is a ready-to-win effect called “full-rotation ready-to-win” in which all three decorative symbols P801 are synchronously and variably displayed in the same manner. What is the standard for ready-to-win performance, ``a situation in which decorative symbols other than one decorative symbol are displayed in the same manner, and a state in which it is notified that a big win will occur if one more symbol stops in the same manner''? Depending on the context, a full spin reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach performance.

Also, in FIG. 18, an "effect setting display area (P850)" is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, a volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The production setting display area P850 has a volume setting function for adjusting the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the game machine P, a light amount adjustment function for adjusting the emission brightness of the decoration lamp P82 of the game machine P, and a production mode. This is an area for displaying the setting status and change status of the presentation mode change function for changing the type of notice presentation to be called and for changing the frequency of occurrence of notice presentation.

The effect setting display area P850 is not always displayed, but is temporarily displayed when the player performs an operation related to the above-described various effect settings (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function, effect mode change function). For example, by operating the cross key P383 in the left/right direction, it is possible to display an effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. In the situation of FIG. 18, when the player further operates the right button of the cross key P383, the set volume level (black area in the figure) increases, and the volume setting value changes from "3" to It is designed to change to "4".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, when adjusting the light amount, it is configured so that the change operation is performed by operating the cross key P383 in the up and down direction, and the effect mode change function is performed according to the operation of the effect button. An example of switching the production mode in a predetermined order is given. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes in relation to the execution of effects during the game, and can be appropriately adopted other than the exemplified method of changing the settings.

In addition, regarding the display of the effect setting display area P850 and the use of various effect setting functions, it is possible to set a period during which the player's effect setting operation is valid and a period during which it is invalid. When executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various effect setting functions is disabled.

(Example of effect display during jackpot game)
Next, based on FIG. 19, a description will be given of the display mode of the effect in a state in which a jackpot game is being executed in the premised pachinko game machine P. FIG.

《Production display indicating the type of jackpot》
At the bottom left of the screen and the top right of the screen in FIG. 19, the decoration pattern P801 that triggered the execution of the big hit game is displayed. At the lower left of the screen, similarly to during execution of the ready-to-win production described above, 1 decorative pattern P801 (also called "big hit design (P805)") is displayed in a display mode smaller than the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable display, and the upper right of the screen is displayed. , the simplified design P802 that was displayed when the variable display of the special symbols was completed is still displayed.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the type of the jackpot executed by the player and the number of game balls that can be obtained during the jackpot are determined by the type of the decorative pattern P801 that triggered the jackpot (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurred). and the game state after the end of the jackpot (normal game state). Therefore, by displaying the decorative patterns (jackpot design P805, simple pattern P802) that triggered the execution of the big win, the type of the big win and the number of game balls expected to be obtained can be determined even during the big win game. It makes it possible to suggest

Further, as a display indicating the type of jackpot, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 imitating a pentagonal shield is displayed below the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "round display (P820)"). The letter "MAX" is written in the center of P821. An icon P821 in the figure indicates a jackpot suggested by the character string "MAX", and indicates that a jackpot game of the maximum round of the premise pachinko gaming machine P is executed. This icon P821 is called a "jackpot icon" or a "consecutive (display) icon", and every time the specific game state and the jackpot game are repeatedly executed, the display increases cumulatively, and the so-called "consecutive game" is displayed. This is an effect display for informing the player how many times and what kind of jackpot he has won in the state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown in the figure, the pachinko machine P on which the premise is assumed, "00 bonus!" An effect of informing the player of the type of the big win is executed by displaying "△△ Chance" (suggesting a big win other than the maximum round).

In addition, for example, even if it is suggested that it is a big hit such as "△△ chance" in which the number of rounds to be executed is small, the execution round of the big hit will be performed as "Extra bonus! + 0 rounds" during the big hit round. In fact, it is also possible to execute a "jackpot promotion effect" such as notifying that the jackpot is the maximum round.

It should be noted that the "jackpot promotion effect" is also used when suggesting that a jackpot game is being executed in which a transition to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the previously notified jackpot type is performed. There is something. For example, from the production of a jackpot game that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the jackpot game (referred to as "non-probability variation jackpot" and "normal jackpot"), the probability fluctuation function will operate after the jackpot game (" There is an effect display such as switching to the effect of "probable variable big hit", "specific big hit").

<<Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game>>
Next, when executing the big win game, the effect display showing the progress of the big win game will be described. In FIG. 19, as an effect showing the effect display of the big hit, "round display (P820)" executed by displaying the character string "ROUND_〇" at the upper left of the screen, and displaying the character string "TOTAL_○○pt" at the lower right of the screen. "Acquired ball number display (P822)" executed in , and "Count display (P825)" displayed with 10 circular image objects substantially in the center of the right side of the screen. Although not shown, during the jackpot game, in addition to these displays, an image display such as an animation called "round effect" is displayed.

《Round display》
"Round display (P820)" is a display indicating what round the round game (unit game) being executed is during the jackpot game. The numerical value on the right side of "ROUND" is updated at the timing when the round game is started. The example of FIG. 19 shows a situation in which the sixth round game is being played.

It should be noted that the "round display (p820)" does not necessarily need to be synchronized with the actual number of rounds executed during the jackpot game. For example, in the specifications of the "small win V" described above, the small win game is counted as the first round, and the first round of the big win game executed after the V winning is treated as the second round. In another example, when the opening pattern of the large winning opening P751 in the round game ends with a transition to the easy ball entry state for a short period of time, the value of "round display" is not updated and the large winning opening P751 is closed. There may be a case where the substantially executed round is treated as a “substantial round” only when the open pattern of is in a state of easy ball entry for a long period of time.

《Acquired number of balls display》
"Number of winning balls display (P822)" is a special game sandwiched between "Number of winning balls display (P823 * not shown)" that displays the cumulative number of game balls that have been acquired in one big hit game during execution. There is a type such as "accumulated winning ball number display (824)" that displays the number of game balls cumulatively acquired in multiple jackpots. FIG. 19 shows an example in which a 5-digit display of the number of acquired balls, ie, "accumulated number of acquired balls display (P824)" is displayed. It should be noted that the "big hit acquired ball number display (P823)" and the "accumulated acquired ball number display (P824)" may be simultaneously displayed in parallel.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the "number of won balls display (P822)" displays the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the big winning hole P751 during the big win game. However, as the accumulation target of the prize ball payout of the acquired ball number display P822, the payout based on the ball entry into the general winning hole P731 and the second start winning hole P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 is accumulated and added. may

In addition, as another modification, the display period of "display the number of acquired balls (P822)" may be displayed not only during the jackpot game but also during execution of a specific game, or "display the number of acquired balls (P822)" , may be extended not only during the big win game but also during the specific game or the small win game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P on which the assumption is made, in addition to the "display of the number of winning balls (P822)", the number of accumulated prize balls paid out is divided into "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", etc. Only in a special situation such as when the number of payouts has been reached, it is possible to execute an effect of ``display of the number of obtained balls'' to emphasize and notify the player in addition to the ``display of the number of obtained balls'' (for example, ``GET 10000! !”).

《Count display》
"Count display (P825)" indicates how many more balls can be entered up to the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 in one round game, or how many game balls can be entered in this round game. This is a display showing whether the ball has entered the big winning hole P751. The former is displayed as a circular object that is shaded in FIG. 19, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object in two columns at the approximately center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example of FIG. 19, as the sixth round of the game, five balls have already been entered into the big winning slot (indicated by white circular objects), and five more balls can be entered (indicated by shaded circular objects). display) is indicated by the count display P825. The count display P825 is reset to its initial state each time a new round is started.

During the execution of the round game of the jackpot game, the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 is consecutive to the game balls that satisfy the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 depending on the flow of the game balls. Winning may occur, and the occurrence of winning with the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an "over winning" occurs, a special effect is performed using the object display of the count display P825, special light emission of the effect lamp P82, and special effect sound is emitted from the speaker P83. You may notify Further, with respect to the above-described winning ball number display P822, the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of "over winning" may be added or may be excluded from addition.

<<Other production display during jackpot game>>
Next, another effect display that is executed in FIG. 19 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed at the substantially center position on the left side of the screen are the aforementioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decoration pattern (jackpot layout P805) at the bottom left of the screen is the "Selected Music Display (P854)" indicating the title of the song being played during the current jackpot game. . In the premise pachinko game machine P, the player can arbitrarily select a piece of music to be reproduced by operating the production button P381 or the cross key P383 during the first round or the second round during the jackpot game. have specifications. As for the selected music display P854, when the music can be changed, an image of "can be changed with (up) and (down) keys" is displayed near the selected music display P854 as shown in FIG.

In addition, the selection of the production during such a jackpot game is not limited to the selection of music, but it is also possible to change the round production and select the production (production mode) during the specific game after the jackpot game (generally (referred to as “effect customization display (P853)”), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Finally, the "Right shot" and the right arrow symbol displayed at the bottom of the simplified layout P802 on the upper right of the screen are image displays related to "Shooting division notification (P830)" (also called "recommended firing position notification" etc.) is. In the premise pachinko game machine P, during the jackpot game, it is a game state in which it is recommended to shoot the game ball to the right side area P501R of the game area, so "Right shot notification (P832)" ("Right shot" , and the right arrow symbol display) are being executed.

The "beating notification" is displayed not only during the jackpot game, but also during the game in the specific game state or during the game in the normal game state. In particular, in a situation where the game state changes (occurrence/end of a big win or occurrence/end of a specific game state), a display of a size larger than the split notification P830 shown in FIG. 19 is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. is temporarily displayed in the center of the screen, etc., an effect is executed to notify the player of the recommended firing position in the next game state.

It should be noted that in the "beating division notification (P830)", the one that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the transition of the game state is the "first division notification image" ("right hitting large display (P831)", " left-handed large display (P833)"), and during the jackpot game or during the specific game state, the recommended firing position in the game state is displayed almost all the time during which the game state continues. It may be expressed as "announcement image" ("right shot small display (P832)", "left shot small display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of effect of "beating split notification (P830)", when detecting a situation in which the game ball is shot at a position other than the recommended shooting position, for example, during a big hit, the left side area of the game area ``Left-handed warning notification'' (``Right-handed attention alerting notification (P835)'' for alerting the player that the game ball should be shot to the right side area P501R of the game area when the game ball is shot to P501L) ) to display a message such as "Please hit right"). In addition, in a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are opposite to each other, "Right-handed warning notification" ("Left-handed attention calling notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of effect display during specific game state)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function during the specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). There are a wide variety of effects displayed in the figure, but the explanation of what was explained in the previous explanation is omitted, and the effects that have not been explained so far, and the differences from the above explanation A description will be given regarding the effect display having.

First, as an effect display that has not been explained so far, as an explanation of the effect display during the specific game state, the "production mode display (P840)" and the "remaining number of games display (P841)" will be explained.

<<Production mode display>>
The "effect mode display (P840)" is a display that indicates the state of the current effect display mode, and is a display that indicates that an advance notice effect corresponding to the corresponding mode is being drawn according to the state information called the effect mode. . When the presentation mode display is different, it is common that the type of announcement presentation visually recognized by the player is made so that the visual impression is greatly different, although there are some announcement presentations that are partly common. . In FIG. 20, "RUSH_MODE" is displayed, indicating that the game state of the pachinko game machine P as a prerequisite is "ST (variable number of cuts)" (high probability/high base state). ing.

It should be noted that the "production mode display (P840)", in addition to notifying the production mode in the specific game state, may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), or may be displayed in one game When the state has a plurality of production modes, the display may be performed temporarily or continuously until the production mode ends each time a condition for switching the production mode is satisfied.

《Remaining number of games displayed》
"Remaining game count display (P841)" is the number of times the special symbols are displayed variably until the specific game state ends (the number of special symbol lotteries), and the number of times the special symbols variably displayed until the current production mode ends. It is a display showing the number of times. In FIG. 20, the display "remaining _56" is executed in the upper center of the screen, and the game state of "ST (variable number of times cut probability)" is played until the special symbol lottery is executed 56 more times. people are notified.

Next, in the example of the effect display in the specific game state shown in FIG. 20, the display that is different from the example of the effect display in the other game states described above will be described.

《Decorative pattern (specific game state)》
At the center of the screen in FIG. 20, a variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed. The display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed smaller in the example of the decorative pattern P801 in the specific game state in FIG. 20 than in the decorative pattern P801 in the normal game state of FIG.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, as the effect display of the specific game state, the effect mode display P840, the remaining game count display P841, and the jackpot icon display P821 are performed in the upper part of the screen, and the selected music is displayed in the lower part of the screen. P854 and display of the number of balls acquired P824 are performed. In the specific game state, such additional display that is not displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is performed. In the case of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, there is a risk that the display of some symbols overlaps a part of each display, and the visibility of the stop display symbols is reduced. The display of the decorative pattern P801 is made small and simplified so that it is difficult for the display to occur. Further, as an example of simplifying and displaying the decorative pattern P801, it is possible to adopt a method of reducing the size and not displaying a character image or the like that is displayed along with the number indicating the pattern.

《Reserved display area (specific game state)》
In the premised pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen in FIG. A display area is provided for the pending object of "H4". Note that the display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the "RUSH_MODE" rendering mode state.

When the change display shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new change starts in the state, the display of the pending object P811 positioned at the bottom in FIG. The display is controlled so that the display is enlarged.

In addition, although not shown, a description will be given of the "result display effect", which is an important effect displayed during the specific game.

《Result display effect》
The "result display effect" is mainly used in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, when the final variation of the specific game state (high base state) is executed, or when the hold that occurred during the specific game state disappears. This is a performance that is performed at the timing when the player recognizes that the “Renso” state has ended, and in the so-called “Renso” state, information on how many times the jackpot game has been won, and how many game balls have been played in total. This is an effect for informing the player whether or not the ball has been acquired (corresponding to display of the number of acquired balls).

[This embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the above-described underlying technology. In the following, differences from the underlying technology will be mainly described, and descriptions of common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements described in the base technology will be described with the same reference numerals.

[Mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment]
The mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 26. FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the appearance of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment when viewed from the front. 22 to 26 are diagrams showing the mechanical configuration of the center decoration unit P6 of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment (particularly, the upper role P650, the side role P670, and the lower role P680 as the production role P560). is.

FIG. 21 shows the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment viewed from the player side. The difference between the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment and the pachinko game machine assumed is the layout configuration of various winning devices such as the first start winning device P710 and the large winning opening P750 on the game board P5, and the center decoration unit P6 , and other various configurations of the game machine are the same as those of the pachinko game machine.

Hereinafter, the arrangement configuration of various winning devices in the game area P501 of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described.

(Game area configuration of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 21, the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment has a center decoration unit P6 arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and has a left area P501L (left-handed area) and a right side area P501L (left-handed area) sandwiching the center decoration unit P6. area P501R (right hitting area).

The left side area P501L is a game area where game balls tend to flow down when the launch strength of the game balls is relatively weak, and as shown in FIG. A winning opening P711) is arranged, and three general winning openings P730 are arranged as a left general winning unit P730L on the lower left side of the game area.

The right side area P501R is a game area where game balls tend to flow down when the launch intensity of the game balls is relatively strong, and a second start winning unit P720A ( A second start winning opening P721A) and a large winning opening unit P750 are provided at the lower right position of the game area P501R. The large winning opening P750 unit is provided with a large winning opening P751 and an operation opening P741.

The right area P501R further includes a second starting winning unit P720B (second starting winning opening P721B) that does not include a normal electric accessory P770 on the left side of the large winning opening unit P750.

Here, the first start winning opening P711 in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment is a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol (sometimes referred to as "special figure 1"), and the second starting winning opening P721A. And the second starting winning opening P721B is a starting winning opening corresponding to the second special symbol (sometimes referred to as "special figure 2").

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, in the normal game state and normal game (low probability/low base), the player shoots a game ball toward the left area P501L (left hitting area) (left hitting). , Aiming to acquire the right to shift to a special game state (big hit, small hit) by entering a game ball into the first start winning hole P711 and receiving a lottery related to the first special symbol is the basic game property. is designed as

On the other hand, normal game state and specific game (at least one of high probability state or high base state is in operation) or special game state (during jackpot game, small hit game), the player is in the right area P501R ( A game ball is launched toward the right-handed area) (right-handed), the game ball is entered into the second start winning opening P721A or the second starting winning opening P721B, and a lottery related to the second special symbol is received. Aiming to acquire the right to shift to a game state (big win, small win), and during a big win game or a small win game, it is possible to aim to win a large amount of prize balls by entering game balls into the big winning opening P751. It is designed as a basic playability.

The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment is configured to have the arrangement configuration of the various prize winning devices in the game area P501 and the basic game performance. Alternatively, if the relevance is low, it can be changed as appropriate.

(Configuration of the center decoration unit of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 26, the production accessory P560 (also referred to as “movable production accessory” or “movable accessory”) provided in the center decoration unit P6 of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment. Give an explanation.

As shown in FIG. 22, the production accessory P560 of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment is a representative production accessory P560 that can advance in front of the production display device P80 (the production display device P80 Three movable accessories that perform exposure, concealment, etc. so as to reduce the visibility of at least a part of the display area are provided. In addition, although not illustrated in this embodiment and not described in detail, the display area of the effect display device P80 is not projected in front of the display region, or the visibility of the display region of the effect display device P80 is hardly affected. A production device that operates without changing its position, and a production operation means P81 (a production button P381 and a lever P382) as a frame movable object P360 provided in the game machine frame (glass frame P3) shown in FIG. The effect operation unit P380) is also included in the "effect accessory P560 (effect movable accessory)".

In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, as the production role P560, the upper role P650 is arranged in the upper area of the production display device P80, and the side role P670L and the side role P670R are arranged on the left and right sides of the production display device P80. is arranged, and a lower role article P680 is arranged below the effect display device P80.

"Superior"
The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment is provided with an upper accessory P650 on the upper part of the center decoration unit P6, and in the normal standby state, as shown in FIG. In this state, when performing a performance action, the player advances to the front of the display area of the performance display device P80 as shown in FIGS.

From the initial state shown in FIG. 22 (the detection state of the elevation initial position sensor P657, not shown), the elevation motor P653, not shown, causes the elevation belt P654, not shown, to rotate. The central decorative portion P651 and the rotary decorative portion P652 move downward according to a lifting guide (not shown) until the state shown (up to the detection state of the lifting effect position sensor P658 (not shown)) is reached.

26, the rotary decoration part P652 is expanded by the action of the rotary motor P659 (not shown) until the presentation state shown in FIG. 23 is reached. The decoration part imitating five petals, which is the part P652, rotates clockwise. The operating position of the rotary decoration part P652 is controlled by a rotation position sensor P660 (rotation initial position sensor) (not shown). By rotating the rotary decoration part P652 counterclockwise from a state in which it has been rotated clockwise by an amount or more, the rotary decoration part P652 is retracted and becomes a non-developed state.

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the upper role P650 is performed during a performance operation that suggests that the expectation of a big hit will increase (for example, when notifying the development of SP reach or a specific high expectation reach), The contents of the performance operation are set so as to operate for deterministically informing the big win in the performance (sometimes referred to as ``win-lose branch performance'') for notifying the end of the ready-to-win performance. Therefore, the frequency of the performance action is set relatively low compared to the other performance role P560, and the action of the senior role P650 evokes high expectations in the player, and the player's A "texture action" (texture effect) is performed, which is an action intended to congratulate the winning of a big hit. In this way, the upper role P650 plays a major role in raising the level of expectations regarding the game result (whether or not), which is the event that the player is most interested in, and informing the player of the win itself. Alternatively, it may be referred to as "main director role", "texture role"), etc.

In the operating state of FIG. 23, the superior object P650 operates at the same time as the secondary object P670, which will be described later, and both the superior object P650 and the secondary object P670 are configured so as not to interfere with each other. . On the other hand, when the upper role object P650 and the side role object P670 move simultaneously with the lower role object P680, there is a possibility that they may come into contact with each other (interfere), and they are configured so as not to move to the performance position at the same time. ing.

In addition, in addition to the first effect operation pattern (strong pattern), which is the effect operation pattern accompanied by the development of the rotary decoration portion P652 described above, the pachinko game machine P upper part P650 of the present embodiment is placed at the position shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a second effect operation pattern (weak pattern) that ends at the stage of moving or ends with an operation that slightly moves up and down in the vicinity of the position shown in FIG. At this time, the first effect operation pattern (strong pattern) suggests the development of a specific reach, while operating to notify the final effect result (or the result of the winning lottery) such as reach , The second effect operation pattern (weak pattern) is used to suggest the development of a specific reach or SP reach with low expectations, and special situations ("B reach" described later) (lever chance)"), the second effect operation pattern is not used when the effect result is notified (the probability is lower than the case where the first effect operation pattern is executed, but the second effect operation pattern is not used) Even if the effect motion pattern is executed, there is a possibility that the game will develop into a ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation, such as the first effect motion pattern).

When the superior object P650 moves, as shown in FIG. 26, it is possible to display the superior object action effect P870 in the display area positioned around the superior object P650 of the production display device P80. In particular, as shown in FIG. 23, the character object full screen effect P873 is displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device P80 when operated by the first effect operation pattern (strong pattern). .

The upper role action effect P870 and the role full screen effect P873 are displayed in a plurality of display modes (for example, white, green, red, gold, Giraffe pattern (manufacturer pattern, rainbow color) can be displayed, and when the performance operation of the upper role P650 is executed in the first performance operation pattern, the character full screen effect P873 is red or more (red, gold, giraffe pattern, rainbow color).

In addition, the upper character object action effect P870 and the character object full screen effect P873 are displayed preferentially (displayed in a higher display layer) than the notice effect, the reach effect, and the decorative pattern P801. Display of information indicating the state of the game, such as the display of information indicating the state of the game, such as the ``right hand small display (P832)'', ``left hand small display (P834)''), and the simple hold display P814, has a display priority so that it can be visually recognized. is set.

《College role》
The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment is provided with horizontal accessories P670 on the left and right sides of the center decoration unit P6. In the normal standby state (non-execution state of the production), the side role P670 has horizontal upper decorative parts P671L, R, horizontal central decorative parts P672L, R, and horizontal lower decoration parts P671L, R as shown in FIG. The decorative parts P673L, R are in a state of being opened in the vertical direction and on standby.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the horizontal role P670 executes the performance, the horizontal upper decorative parts P671L, R, the horizontal central decorative parts P672L, R, and the horizontal lower decorative parts P673L, R are arranged from both sides of the center decoration unit P6. It is configured to advance while bringing the relative positional relationship in the vertical direction close to each other.

Note that the left hand side object P670L and the right side side object P670R are driven by stepping motors (driving motors P674), not shown, which are individual drive sources, respectively. is driven, the lateral upper decorative portion P671L and the lateral central decorative portion P672L are directed toward the center of the display area of the effect display device P80 by the action of a drive transmission mechanism (for example, a rack and pinion mechanism, a link mechanism, etc.) not shown. , and the horizontal lower decorative portion P673L are configured to operate (although the explanation is omitted, the horizontal character P670R arranged on the right side is the same).

The action positions of the side role article P670L and the side role article P670R are detected by storage position sensors P675L and R for detecting the initial positions provided corresponding to each, and the performance action positions provided corresponding to each. Detected by shielded position sensors P676L, R for

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the side role P670 includes the pre-reach notice effect at the start of the fluctuation or before developing into the reach effect, the pre-reading effect, the post-reach notice during the reach effect, and the decorative pattern (special design). ) is temporarily stopped, and the timing at which the chance number is finally stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect. It is the production accessory P560 with the highest operating frequency among the three production accessories P560 that will be representatively explained with respect to the machine P.

The action of such side role P670 is basically included in the production as part of the notice production (notice before reach, notice after reach), or it is combined with the notice production as a pre-reading production independent of the notice production. The purpose is to create an effect of heightening the expectation that the advance notice performance will lead to a favorable ending for the player, and that the subsequent performance content will be changed to a performance content with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. is set.

In this way, the side role P670 is intended to directly notify a big hit or suggest that the expectation of a big win is very high only by the action of the side role P670, like the above-mentioned high-ranking role P650. It is not set, and the purpose is to create a lively effect to enhance the splendor and appearance of the entire production by producing in combination with other production devices such as the production display device P80, other production accessories P560, and the speaker P83. It is a secondary production role used as. Therefore, the side role P670 may be referred to as a "sub-directing accessory" (or a "sub-directing accessory", a "lively role", etc.).

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the side role object P670 is performing a performance action. In FIG. 24, the horizontal upper decorative parts P671L, R, the horizontal central decorative parts P672L, R, and the horizontal lower decorative parts P673L, R of the horizontal role P670 are in a state of shielding the display area of the effect display device P80. Then, whether or not the special decoration P804 (a symbol written as ``NEXT'', which when stopped and displayed produces a ``pseudo consecutive'' effect), which is a decorative pattern for a special effect during execution of the normal reach, is temporarily stopped. It is a situation that is inciting to the player.

In FIG. 24, the left decorative design P801L and the right decorative design P801R which are already in the stopped display state (or the temporary stop display state) are displayed smaller than the middle decorative design P801C which is about to be stopped displayed as the special design. , and whether or not the special design is stopped as the middle decorative pattern P801C is highlighted by the action of the horizontal performance role P670 and the horizontal role performance effect P871 (already displayed as the first and second stop patterns The left and right decorative patterns P801L and R are displayed small in positions to avoid interference with the side role P670 in order to make the tenpai patterns recognizable or to prevent visibility from being lowered. The left and right decorative patterns P801L and R may be hidden if not intended).

In the example of FIG. 24, in the display area of the effect display device P80 (the display area that is not hidden behind the side object P670) that is easy to see when the side object P670 is moving to the shielding position, A special decoration pattern P804 is displayed larger than the normal decoration pattern P801 in the stop decorative pattern row (decorative pattern row that is not in the temporary stop display mode), and other display is completed in the stop display mode (temporary stop display mode). The decorative pattern P801 of the decorative pattern columns (left column, right column) is displayed in a small size. By displaying in this manner, the player's attention is attracted to the symbols stopped and displayed in the medium symbols formed as the final stop symbol row by limiting the area visually recognized by the shielding of the side role P670. can be done.

In this way, under a situation where at least part of the display area of the effect display device P80 is blocked by the operation of the effect accessory P560, the timing for attracting attention to the display of the decorative pattern in the next stop display mode is simulated. This can be applied not only to continuous effects, but also to ready-to-reach effects. Furthermore, not only in the final stop symbol row, but also at least a part of the display area of the effect display device P80 is displayed by the operation of the effect accessory P560 when the second stop symbol row that switches to the second stop display mode is stopped. It is also possible to use shielding to draw attention to the already stopped symbol row and whether to form a reach mode.

In addition, the side actor action effect P871 has a plurality of production patterns (for example, the display colors are white, blue, green, and red, and the display sizes are small, medium, and large), similar to the upper role action effect P870. Depending on the display mode, the possibility (expectation level) of an advantageous performance result for the player differs. For example, in the example of FIG. 24, when the side role action effect P871 is white, the special decoration P804 (“NEXT” pattern) is not stopped and displayed as a middle decorative pattern P801C, and a pattern such as “4” is displayed as it is. 343" etc. is highly likely to be notified, and when the side actor action effect P871 is red, the special arrangement P804 is always stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-continuation (pseudo-variation) re-variation is performed. An example configured as follows.

As described above, the side role P670 starts its action at the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation as a notice effect before the reach, or at the timing of the end of the fluctuation such as the stop of the chance eye etc. at the end of the fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 24, since it is a performance accessory P560 that operates relatively frequently, there is no or little interference with the simple display P802 and the simple reservation display P814 during the performance operation. (That is, the display positions of the display showing the game state such as the simplified display P804, the simple hold display P814, or the unillustrated hitting division notification P830 are determined based on the movement range of the side role object P670). It should be noted that the display positions of the simplified drawing P802 and the simple reserved display P814 may be determined by including the motion range of other roles such as the upper role P650 and the lower role P680, which will be described later. In the pachinko game machine P, the display position is determined on the basis of the side role P670, which is the direction role P560 that is likely to act immediately after the start of the fluctuation and immediately before the stop of the fluctuation. If the lower role P680 is likely to move at the same timing as the side role P670 before and after the start and stop of fluctuation, the simplified layout P804 and the It is preferable to determine the display position of the simple hold display P814 (as for texture accessories, it is configured to return to the initial position by the end of fluctuation basically in any situation as long as there is no abnormality etc. therefore not considered).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 24, the character object action effect such as the side character action effect P871 is displayed (displayed in a higher display layer) than the display of the decorative pattern P801 and the notice effect (displayed in a higher display layer). , the display priority is lower than the operation promoting image (button image P881, etc.) prompting the operation of the effect operation means P81 such as the effect button P381 displayed for instructing the content of the effect to the player. Display information indicating the game state such as P804, a simple hold display P814, or an unillustrated beating notification P830, etc., rather than a display for letting the player recognize the state of the game even under the condition that the production accessory P560 is operating. The display priority is set low.

《Low-duty》
The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment has a lower part P680 under the center decoration unit P6. In the normal waiting state (non-execution state of the effect), the lower role object P680 is in a state of retreating from the display area of the effect display device P80 and waiting as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the lower role object P680 is executing the performance action, as shown in FIG. The central decorative portion P681 and the feather-like decorative portion P682 are easily visible.

The lower part P680 is driven by a drive motor P684 (not shown). When the drive motor P684 rotates, a rack and pinion mechanism (not shown) operates, and the central decoration P681 rises with the lowered position sensor P686 (initial position). Up-and-down operation is possible within the detection range (production operation range) of the position sensor P687 (production position). The pinnate decoration part P682 of the lower part P680 rotates a connecting gear (not shown) in conjunction with the vertical movement of the central decoration part P681. It switches from a downwardly inclined state toward the center to an upwardly inclined state (the state shown in FIG. 25).

The motion range of the performance action of the lower role object P680 overlaps with the performance motion range of each of the upper role object P650 and the side role object P670, and either the upper role object P650 or the side role object P670 operates at the same time. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, only the performance action of the lower role P680 is prepared independently. It should be noted that the directing role P560 can operate simultaneously like the upper role P650 and the side role P670 in FIG. However, the more the production role P560 that operates at the same time, the more power is devoted to the operation of the production role P560, and the production control CPU of the production control board P41, the production lamp P82, the speaker P83, and other production devices and control devices. Since there is an increased risk of affecting the operation of the , an electrical limit may be provided to limit the combination of simultaneously drivable production accessories P560 (the total current value when driving a plurality of production accessories P560). be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, an example of the effect operation of the lower role item P680 will be described. The lower role item P680 is a "sub-effect accessory" similar to the side role item P670 described above, and is set to have a relatively higher effect execution frequency than the upper role item P650, which is the "main effect accessory". It is a performance accessory P560.

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the lower role P680 is related to the content of the notice effect, such as when the character appears in the notice effect (see FIG. 25) or immediately after the start of re-variation of the decorative pattern P801 in the pseudo continuous effect. A production operation for the purpose of executing a certain production is mainly set, and the production display device P80 is displayed like a look-ahead production that is performed in combination with the display content of the production display device P80 like the side role P670. The effect action is set so that it is rarely used as an effect suggesting content different from the display content (Note that the lower role P680 may also be set with an effect action pattern used as a look-ahead effect). Since the lower role object P680 set in this way is a production role object with more production operation contents in a situation where there is a subsequent production as the production content than the side role object P670, the side role object P670 operates. It is a performance accessory that makes it easier for the player to get a sense of expectation for winning a big hit than when the player is playing the game.

In the production example of FIG. 25, as a notice effect after reach (prediction during reach effect), a character cut-in (effect in which a strip-shaped character image is superimposed and displayed in the center of the display area of the effect display device P80) and a lower role are displayed. An example effect is shown in which the P680 is operating. As shown in FIG. 25, the lower character action effect P872 is preferentially displayed (displayed in a higher display layer) than the character cut-in notice displayed superimposed on the background reach effect as the post-reach notice effect. It has become. At this time, in the lower role action effect P872, a plurality of production patterns (for example, a pattern in which the display colors are blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, patterns with small, medium, and large display sizes, patterns with different display animation movements, etc.). Also, at this time, the character cut-in characters displayed as the lower part action effect P872 are associated to some extent, and the character A in the first composition is associated with the blue effect, and the character A or character B in the second composition is associated with the green effect. , a red effect for character A or character C in the third composition.

While the lower role P680 and the side role P670 each play a role as a secondary performance role, the side role P670 is directly related to the effect content of the advance notice effect displayed on the effect display device P80. While it is also used in the execution of performance accessory actions (prediction of performance accessory actions) as a low look-ahead effect and is widely used with high frequency, the lower role P680 is mainly used for the effect accessory actions related to the advance notice effect. , and while there are fewer places where it is used as a production action than the side role P670 (the frequency of execution of the production action is low), it directly suggests the result (expectation) of the variable display of the special symbol being executed. It is a directing role that is easy to relate to.

(Movable frame: Description of operation of production operation unit)
FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram of the operation of the performance operation unit P380, which is one of the frame movable objects provided in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment.

FIG. 27(a) shows the initial position state (initial state) in which the effect operation unit P380 does not perform the effect operation, and FIG. 27(b) shows the effect state after the effect operation unit P380 performs the effect operation. is shown. The production operation unit P380 has a production button P381 and a lever P382 integrally formed. In the initial state, the lever P382 cannot be operated, and in the production state, the lever P382 can be operated. It has become.

More specifically, the effect operation unit P380 rotates a cylindrical grooved cam (not shown) connected to the pointing shaft of the effect button P381 and the lever P382 by the operation of the lever lifting motor P389. rises from the position detected by the lever initial position sensor P386 shown in FIG. 27(a) to the position detected by the lever raised position sensor P387 shown in FIG. 27(b). When the effect operation unit P380 moves to the position of the lever raised position sensor P387, the lever input sensor P388 can detect the input operation of the lever P382 by the player's tilting operation of the lever P382.

(Another example of character action effect)
As described above, in accordance with the actions of the higher role P650, the lower role P670, and the lower role P680, the upper role action effect P870, the side role action effect P871, the lower role action effect P872, and the role full screen effect It has been explained that an effect image such as P873 (the effect of displaying a uniform effect image (rainbow effect or the like) over the entire display area of the effect display device P80 during the effect of FIG. 23) is displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, there are other effects displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 in response to the action of the effect accessory P560 (referred to as "effect linked display effect"). . An example of other production accessory-linked display production is shown below.

《Pseudo role object action image》
The "pseudo role product motion image" is an image simulating the actual performance role P560 (or a similar image with a slightly modified design) that enhances the role object movement effect of the production role P560, This is a display effect that makes it possible to execute the effect of displaying in place of the actual role object movable effect.

For example, a pseudo-accessory motion image similar to the performance accessory P560 is interlocked with the motion of the performance accessory P560, and the pseudo-accessory moves forward or backward in the movement direction of the performance accessory P560 within the motion range of the performance accessory P560. By displaying an action image, the player is made to perceive it as an afterimage or blurring, and a case is conceivable in which an impression is given by giving an illusion of the action speed of the performance accessory P560.

In addition, the simulated role product motion image is displayed in a situation where the performance role product P560 cannot operate (for example, when the performance role product P560 cannot be restored due to step-out or the like and becomes a role product error state that prohibits the operation) ), by displaying the simulated role product motion image at the timing when the performance accessory P560 operates, even in a situation where the actual performance accessory P560 cannot perform the movable effect, the performance including the operation of the performance accessory P560 is performed. It can be made to recognize that it was a mode.

Since the "pseudo accessory action image" is an image that substitutes for the effect accessory P560 positioned in front of the effect display device P80 and has the effect of complementing the effect, It is an image with a higher display priority than the effect images such as the effect P871, the lower role item movement effect P872, and the role item full screen effect P873. display priority is low).

In addition, the "pseudo role product motion image" is an image (or a similar image) that imitates the production role product P560, but the display color, etc. need not be the same color as the design of the actual production role product P560. The image may be an image whose appearance has been changed by a display effect such as gray scale or sepia.

《Role movement inciting effect》

"Role object motion stimulating effect" is one of the display effects linked to the performance role object motion, and is the timing of performing the operation of the performance role object P560 (including the case of a fake pattern in which the performance role P560 is not actually operated). ), an effect image is displayed in the vicinity of the performance accessory P560, or a pseudo role product motion image is displayed in the vicinity of the operation range of the performance accessory P560, so that the target performance accessory P560 This is an effect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that an action will be performed.

The "accessory action stimulating effect" is an effect suggesting that the action of the presentation accessory P560 leading to the degree of expectation of winning the special game is performed, and has a plurality of display patterns as the display pattern. As for the display pattern, the display colors are white, red, and gold, and the display size can be switched between small, medium, and large. (expectation level) is suggested to the player.

(Production movable accessory_initialization/recovery operation processing)
Next, using FIGS. 28 to 30, a description will be given of the “effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process” of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment.

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the production movable accessory_initialization/return operation process includes an "initial position return operation process" for returning the position of the production accessory P560 to the initial position, The process includes two processes of "initial operation confirmation process" for confirming whether the can operate normally (see FIG. 28).

Effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation processing is performed when the power of the game machine is turned on or when there is an operation abnormality (an event such as an error that requires operation confirmation) in the effect accessory P560. This process is executed when Determination of operation abnormality is performed in the production control process (step 4012) based on the result of the input port monitoring process (step 4008), which is the process of the production control board (production control CPU). A flag for requesting return operation processing (operation instruction, operation control) is established, and a request for initialization/return operation is executed for production accessory P560 in production device control processing (step 4010).

In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, there are the following four situations in which a request for the effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process is made. In addition, the processing executed in the production movable accessory_initialization/return operation processing under each situation is also described.
1. Requests for both the initialization operation "initial position return operation processing" and the "initial operation confirmation processing" at power-on are executed.
2. When a step number over error occurs, both requests for "initial position return operation processing" and "initial operation confirmation processing" are executed.
3. When a position check error occurs, only the request for "initial position return operation processing" is executed.
4. When a time monitoring check error occurs, only the request for "initial position return operation processing" is executed.

Here, the "step number over error" drives the number of steps that becomes the determination threshold after the design action request is executed when an action request (effect action or initial position return action) is made to the production accessory P560. This is an error that occurs when the sensor that should be detected is not inspected even if it is output to the motor. "Position check error" occurs at a predetermined game timing such as when fluctuation starts (or fluctuation ends) or when the game state changes. As a result of determining whether or not the role P560 is at the position where it should exist by various sensors (initial position sensor of the performance role P560, performance position sensor), the performance role P560 is not in the assumed position (the sensor to be detected is detected The "time monitoring check error" is an error that can occur as a result of making the same determination as the "position check error" at regular time intervals (for example, 5 seconds).

It should be noted that the "time monitoring check error" is excluded from the error monitoring target for the "position check error", and the production accessory P560 that is executing the production operation assigned by the variable production or the look-ahead production.

Also, the request for the effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process is made when the variable display of the special symbol is performed (for example, when the motion of the effect accessory P560 is performed as the variable effect). is also feasible. Then, when a request for the performance movable accessory_initialization/return operation processing is made, the variation is performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols until the performance movable accessory_initialization/return operation processing is completed. The operation of the production accessory P560 (at least the production accessory to be subjected to the production movable accessory_initialization/return operation process) based on the performance execution pattern is prohibited.

<<Direction Movable Accessory_Initialization/Return Operation Processing>>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the processing flow of "effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process" (step 5800). "Effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process" is a process performed in the process within the effect device control process (step 4010) of the effect control board (effect control CPU). The details of the processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in the “movable production accessory_initialization/return operation process”, it is determined whether or not a request related to the initialization/recovery operation of the production accessory P560 has been executed (step 5802). If a request for initialization/recovery operation is not made to the production accessory P560 (step 5802 NO), the process is terminated without performing subsequent processes. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a request for initialization/return operation for the production accessory P560 (step 5802 YES), the process proceeds to "initial position return operation processing" (step 5804), which is a sub-module process.

Details of the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the "initial position return operation process" is completed, it is then determined whether the current situation is a game stop state such as setting change (or setting confirmation) (step 5806). If the game is in a stopped state such as during setting change (setting confirmation), the production control board (production control CPU) waits for "initial operation confirmation processing" without the judgment result being NO until the game stop state is released. situation.

The reason for waiting for the "initial operation confirmation process" (step 5810) after the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804) when the game is in a stopped state such as during setting confirmation (setting change) is that when the power is turned on In a game stop state such as changing settings (setting confirmation) to be transferred, the effect display device P80 shows the current setting status and security information indicating that the setting is being changed, and other settings for the game machine. It is possible to display the administrator menu screen, etc., and the effect accessory P560, which was positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device P80 before the power failure, is moved to the display area by the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804). This is because it is after retracting from the front, and it is considered to be an optimal situation in which the visibility of the display area of the effect display device P80 is not hindered due to an anomaly in the operation of the character object such as stepping out during the "initial operation confirmation process".

If it is determined that the settings are not being checked (settings are being changed) in the "effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process" (step 5806 NO), then the power is turned on or the number of steps is exceeded. It is determined whether there is (step 5808). As described above, the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment is designed to make a request for the "initial operation confirmation process" when the power is turned on and when an error occurs when the number of steps is exceeded. It's for. In other words, if the request is based on a position check error or a time monitoring check error, there is no need to execute the "initial operation confirmation process", so the effect control board (effect control CPU) is a submodule process "initial operation Confirmation processing” (step 5810) is not performed.

The details of the "initial operation confirmation process" will be described later. When the "initial action confirmation process" ends, the information of the request related to the execution of the initialization/return action is cleared, and the "effect movable accessory_initialization/return action process" ends.

<<Initial position return operation processing>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the “initial position return operation process” (step 5804) relating to the operation control of the performance accessory P560 of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described. "Initial position return operation processing" is the performance accessory P560 determined not to exist at the initial position (the performance position sensor or the intermediate position sensor may be the "initial position" instead of the initial position sensor depending on the performance situation). is a process for returning to the initial position.

In the "initial position return operation process", first, a request to stop the operation (operation instruction, operation control) is output to all the performance accessories P560 (step 5820). In this process, when an error occurs due to a request for a performance operation that was output before the power failure, or a position check error or time monitoring check error, the operation of other performance accessories P560 in operation is stopped, This process is intended to prevent interference with other performance accessories when returning the performance accessory P560 to the initial position.

When the motion stop request for all the performance accessories P560 is completed, the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment then instructs the lower role P680 to move to the initial position (detection position of the lowered position sensor P686). I do. If the lower article P680 has already been positioned at the initial position (when the lowered position sensor P686 has already been detected), this process is omitted.

When the lower role P680 moves to the initial position (or the initial position return operation is omitted), the upper role P650 moves to the initial position return operation. In the initial position return operation of the superior object P650, first, it is confirmed whether the elevation initial position sensor P657 and the rotation position sensor P660, which are sensors related to the initial position of the superior object P650, are in the detection state (step P5824). As described above, the upper accessory P650 is configured to switch between the expanded state and the retracted state of the rotary decoration P652 depending on the rotation direction at the timing when the rotary decoration P652 detects the rotation position sensor. Even if the sensor P660 is in the detection state, there is a possibility that the rotary decoration part P652 is deployed, so it cannot be immediately moved to the detection position of the elevation initial position sensor P657. Therefore, in the case of returning the upper part P650, which does not exist in the initial position, to the initial position, the rotating decoration part P652 is expanded while being temporarily moved to the performance position, and after securely changing to the retracted state, It is necessary to let the sensor P657 detect it.

When it is determined that the superior object P650 does not exist at the initial position (step 5824 NO), the superior object P650 is moved until the elevation effect position sensor P658 reaches the detection state (step 5826). In addition, when the upper role object P650 is already at the position of the elevation effect position sensor P658, this process is omitted.

In the initial position return operation of the superior object P650, when the superior object P658 moves to the position (performance position) where the elevation initial position sensor P658 is detected, the rotating motor P659 is subsequently driven in the direction in which the rotary decorative portion P652 is deployed. Drive (step 5828). In addition to the next detection by the rotational position sensor P660, the rotary ornament P652 rotates to the retracted position at the position detected by the rotational position sensor P660 by the return operation (reverse rotation of the rotary motor P659).

When the superior object P650 changes to the deployed state at the production position, the “initial position return operation process” subsequently instructs the initial position return operation to the superior object P650 and the side object P670 at the same time (step 5830). In other words, after the rotating decorative portion P652 of the senior object P650 is put in the stored state, it is moved to the position detected by the elevation initial position sensor P657, and the secondary object P670 is moved to the position detected by the storage position sensor P675. (Processing is omitted when the side object P670 is in the initial position detected by the storage position sensor P675). Only the process of step 5830 is designed to simultaneously execute actions for a plurality of performance role objects P560. It is a combination of the actions of the performance accessory P560 that does not pose any problem in terms of electrical limitation (restriction of the total current value) even if they operate simultaneously in terms of performance.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the lower role P680, the upper role P650, and the side role P670 are sequentially performed in the "initial position return operation process". The processing order of the "initial position return operation process" is configured to determine whether or not to execute in a predetermined order for a plurality of production accessories P560, and perform the operation to return to the initial position. When actions are performed in order, power for the action is not supplied to the performance accessory that is not the target of the action. The initial position return operation processing configured in this way prevents interference during the return operation by not starting the return operation of the initial position at the same time for all the production accessories P560, and by driving at the same time It is possible to prevent the use of a large amount of electric power from adversely affecting the operation of the performance control board and other performance devices. In addition, as in step 5830, it is possible to instruct the initial position return operation at the same time for the performance accessories P560 that do not interfere with each other and that do not interfere with the electrical restriction even if they are driven at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the initial position return operation of the entire production accessory P560 from becoming excessively long.

<<Initial operation confirmation process>>
Next, detailed processing of the “initial operation confirmation processing” (step 5810) will be described. The "initial action confirmation process" is a process of checking whether or not the effect action can be executed in order for all the effect accessories P560 provided in the gaming machine (for example, all the effect accessories P560 are placed in the initial position to the production position) to confirm that it can operate normally.

When the "initial operation confirmation process" is started in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the operation confirmation process of the lower role P680 is first performed (step 5850). The lower role P680 operation confirmation process operates the drive motor P683 to move the lower role P650 from the state detected by the lowered position sensor P686 to the position detected by the raised position sensor P687, and then again to the lowered position sensor P686. It is configured to perform processing to operate until the state is detected.

When the confirmation operation of the lower role P680 is completed, the operation confirmation process of the higher role P650 is subsequently executed. In the operation confirmation processing of the superior role P650, the central decorative portion P681 of the superior role P650 is moved from the detection position of the elevation initial position sensor P657 to the position detected by the elevation effect position sensor P658 by operating the elevation motor P653. (step 5852). Then, when the central decorative portion P681 of the upper role P650 moves to the performance position, the rotary motor P659 is operated to confirm whether the rotary decorative portion P652 can be transformed into the unfolded state, and the rotational position sensor P660 is detected next. The rotation motor P659 is operated by the amount of additional drive that can be accommodated by the rotary decoration portion P652 during the return operation, and the deformation operation of the rotary decoration portion P652 is confirmed (step 5854).

When confirmation of the performance action of the rotating decoration part P652 at the performance position of the upper role P650 is completed, an instruction to return the upper role P650 to the initial position is given, and the side role P670 is instructed to return to the initial position. Give an instruction to perform the operation confirmation process. In the operation confirmation processing of the side role P670, each decorative portion (horizontal upper decorative portion P671, horizontal central decorative portion P672, horizontal lower decorative portion 673) of the side role P670 is moved to the production position by operating the drive motor P674. make it work. That is, after the drive motor P674 is operated from the state detected by the storage position sensor P675 to the state where the shield position sensor P676 is detected, the drive motor P674 is rotated in reverse until the state detected by the storage position sensor P675 again. It is configured to allow

In the "initial action confirmation process", the upper role P650 and the side role P670 have a period in which they perform their actions simultaneously, but they perform their actions at different timings from when they actually perform their performance actions (see FIG. 23). is configured as More specifically, when the motions of the upper role object P650 and the side role object P670 are performed as a production operation, the overlapping period of the operation output in which the operation output is performed at the same time is the operation output when the operation output is performed simultaneously in the initial operation confirmation process. It is configured to be longer than the overlapping period, and in the case of the initial action, by reducing the period of simultaneous actions as much as possible, the period in which the respective actions of the respective production accessories P560 are performed overlaps. is avoided, and the confirmation person can accurately and easily visually recognize the action of the performance accessory P560.

(Response to operation error of performance accessories)
In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, when a malfunction occurs with respect to the performance accessory P560 (for example, when the above-mentioned step number over error or position check error occurs), the performance movable accessory_initialization/ Although the return operation process is executed, even if the effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process is executed, if the situation where the effect operation can be executed for the effect accessory P560 cannot be secured (for example, the initial position If a situation occurs such as not returning to the initial position even after repeating the return operation process and initial operation confirmation process three times, or not being able to move to the production position), in order to prevent the failure of the production accessory P560, the corresponding production It is configured to prohibit actions of the role P560 and the performance role P560 that may interfere with the corresponding performance role P560.

In addition, even when the movable effect operation of the effect accessory P560 is prohibited due to the occurrence of such an error, the light emitting part of the effect accessory P560 is configured to execute the light emitting effect. In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, since the light emission pattern for lighting the light emission part of the production accessory P560 is not exclusively set when the operation is prohibited, it is the same as when the normal movable production operation is executed. lighting is controlled.

(Playability of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, the game characteristics of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the transition between the normal game and the specific game in the normal game state and the effect state. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the types of jackpots in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table normally used in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment.

The pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment employs parallel control, and is a gaming machine capable of independently variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

It should be noted that the playability described below is the playability when the player normally plays the game, and the description of irregular situations is omitted.

《Normal game (low probability / low base)》
First, the game characteristics of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment, when a player first starts playing, the game is played in the normal game (low probability/low base) shown on the left side of FIG.

In the normal game (low probability / low base), the player shoots the game ball toward the first start winning port P711, aiming to win a big hit by special symbol lottery of the first special symbol (see Fig. 31 (a) ). When a big win is obtained by the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern, after the big win game is started, the big win game is executed by the special pattern (big win pattern) stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device P51 when starting the big win. Depending on the type (see FIG. 32), either “time-saving game (low probability / high base)” (see FIG. 31 (b)) or “variable game (high probability / high base)” (see FIG. 31 (d)) are distributed to specific games.

In normal games, the type of production state (production mode) is based on the "normal stage" (normal production mode) such as "A stage" to "C stage", and there are also "special stages". As (special production modes), it has "D stage", "E stage", and "character complete announcement mode".

"D stage" is a production stage (production mode) dedicated to pre-reading effects, and if you win a special pre-reading effect lottery, somewhere during the variable display before the variable display of the pending target for pre-reading starts It is a production stage that shifts with timing. In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, when shifting to the "D stage", the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device P80 is changed to a special one until a predetermined timing during which the hold targeted for the look-ahead effect is fluctuating. In addition, the side role object P670 is configured to continue to swing near the initial position, and the magnitude of the action of the side role object P670 and the side role object action effect P871 increase as the degree of expectation increases. becomes larger and the display pattern changes to one with a high degree of expectation.

"E stage" is a case where a pseudo-variation effect (pseudo continuation) is executed, and re-variation display after the third time (referred to as "pseudo X" depending on the number of re-variations, in this case referred to as "pseudo 3") It is a special production stage (special production mode) that shifts when it becomes. In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, when it becomes pseudo 3, it is definite to shift to the high expectation reach (SP reach) among the reach effects, and it shifts to any high expectation reach. A dedicated effect for indicating whether or not is displayed before the start of the ready-to-win effect. In this "E stage", when it develops to normal reach, a plurality of icons suggesting high-expectation reach effects are displayed, and along with the moving display of the displayed icon images, the upper role P650, the right side role P670R, the lower role The object P680 and the left side role object P670L operate in order, and finally, one of the production roles P560 moves to the production position and the icon image is displayed, suggesting the high expectation reach of the development destination ( In the case of the upper role P650, it will develop to the highest expected reach, and before the icon image becomes visible, the movable role production using the rotating decoration part P652 and the role full screen effect P873 ).

The "accessory complete notification mode" is a special production stage (special production mode). In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, when the "perfect announcement mode" is selected, the upper role P650 and the side role P670 move to the front of the effect display device P80 (the state shown in FIG. 23). ), and a notice effect is executed mainly based on the actions of the light-emitting units provided in the upper role P650 and the side role P670 and the actions of the side role P670 (the character display, button image P881, etc. may be displayed). In the "personal object complete notification mode", in the event of a big hit variation, the effect of rotating the rotary decoration part P652 of the superior object P650 is finally executed to announce that the big hit will be achieved, and then the superior object P650. and the side role P670 returns to the initial position, and the display area of the effect display device P80 that has become visible performs an effect that notifies the type of the jackpot game won (light emission mode when the rotary decoration part P652 rotates) may suggest the type of jackpot to be won).

"D stage", "E stage", and "accessory complete announcement mode" are examples, and may be executed during a specific game as a modification. In addition, the "accessory complete notification mode" does not have to operate in advance the performance accessory P560 (in the previous example, the upper role P650 and the side role P670). P881 is displayed, and when the button is pressed, if the performance role P560 (the senior role P650 and the side role P670) operates, a big win is achieved. good.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, in the normal game (low probability/low base), a predetermined number of symbol changes (for example, 660 times) are performed after the RAM is cleared or after the previous jackpot game. Also, when the result of the special symbol lottery is "lost", the game shifts to a "support mode" which is a specific game (low probability/high base) without going through the jackpot game. "Support mode" is one of the states of the specific game (low probability/high base) to be described later, and whether the variable display corresponding to the special symbol lottery of 500 times is performed or the special symbol lottery wins the big hit game. (The jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices P51 and P52). In addition, "support mode" does not exist when shifting via a big hit.

《Specific game: Time saving game (low probability / high base)》
Next, the time-saving game (low probability/high base), which is one of the specific games in the normal game state, will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, there are two types of specific game (low probability/high base) states. One is the "revival chance" and the other is the aforementioned "support mode". "Resurrection Chance" and "Support Mode" differ in entry timing and termination conditions.

``Resurrection chance'' and ``support mode'' are triggered and end conditions are that the ``resurrection chance'' shifts after the jackpot game (especially after the normal jackpot game, which will be described later), and 100 special symbol lotteries are performed. Or, it is a specific game state that continues until a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery within 100 times. On the other hand, in the "support mode", as described above, the symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 660 times) after the RAM is cleared or after the last big hit game, and in both cases the result of the special symbol lottery is "lost". It is a specific game state which is continued until a special symbol lottery is performed 500 times or a big win is obtained in the special symbol lottery within 500 times.

In the normal game state of the specific game (low probability/high base), the player shoots the game ball to the right game area P501R, passes the game ball through the operation opening P741, and the normal electric accessory of the second start winning unit P720. P770 is operated, the opening/closing member P771 of the second start winning unit P720 is set to the winning easy state, the game ball is entered into the second start winning opening P721, and the game is played by receiving the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol (this A game performed by shooting a game ball into the right game area P501R is called a "right-handed game").

When a big win is obtained in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol (see FIG. 31(c)), the big winning symbol (the special symbol stop-displayed on the second special symbol display device P52) to start the big winning game. Depending on the type of the jackpot game, after the jackpot game, it shifts to the "support mode" again (for normal jackpots, see FIG. 31 (b)), or "X rush" (high probability / high base) or "X "Rush SUPER" (high probability/low base) (when the probability variable jackpot, see FIG. 31(d)).

《Specific game: Variable game (high probability / high base or high probability / low base)》
Subsequently, the game in the normal game state of the probability variation game among the specific games of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, there are two types of variable probability games: "X Rush" (high probability/low base) and "X Rush SUPER" (high probability/low base).

The variable probability games "X Rush" and "X Rush SUPER" shift after a specific jackpot game (after the jackpot game of the variable probability big win) and continue until the next big win game is started. In addition, as a modification, if a special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) during "X Rush" (high probability / high base), the electric chew support function will end and "X Rush SUPER" (high probability / low base).

The game methods of "X Rush" and "X Rush SUPER" are performed in a right-handed game similar to the time-saving game described above. When a jackpot is obtained in a right-handed game (see FIG. 31(e)), a jackpot game is played according to the type of the jackpot pattern (special pattern stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display device P52) to start the jackpot game. After that, either shift to the "support mode" (for normal jackpots, see FIG. 31(b)), or again the variable game "X Rush" (high probability/high base) or "X Rush SUPER" (high probability/low base) (in the case of a probability variable jackpot, see FIG. 31(d)).

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set high even under the condition that the electric chew support function is not operating (for example, when the probability of the normal symbol lottery is low: 299/300, High probability state: 300/300), even in normal games (low probability / low base) and “X Rush SUPER” (high probability / low base), the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 provided in the second start winning unit P720 It is becoming more frequent.

In the state where the electric chew support function is operating, regarding the operation of the normal electric accessory P770, the opening extension function is activated, and when the right-handed game is played, the normal electric accessory P770 is operating. It is configured to occupy most of the time (for example, after the normal electric accessory P770 operates for 6 seconds, the normal electric accessory P770 is configured to operate again after about 1 second by the next normal symbol lottery. ), when a right-handed game is played in a high base state (state where the electric chew support function is operating), the game ball is downstream (large winning opening unit P750) from the second start winning opening P721. It is designed so that it does not flow too much.

On the other hand, in a situation where the electric chew support function is not operating (normal game or "X rush SUPER"), the second start winning opening P721 is won, and the game is played when the normal electric accessory P770 is not operating. A game ball can flow down toward a large winning opening unit P750 downstream of the second starting winning opening P721, and when a small winning is won by a special symbol lottery of a second special symbol, a small winning game is played. It is configured to be able to increase the number of game balls based on the winning to the inside large winning opening P751.

In addition, during "X Rush SUPER", since the special symbol probability variation and variation time reduction function are operating, the variation time of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol tends to be shortened (about 1 to 2 seconds) On the other hand, since the special symbol variation time reduction function is not activated in the normal game, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be a long-time variation (for example, 3 minutes), It is configured so that the number of game balls decreases even if the right-handed game is continued. A game state such as this "X Rush SUPER" in which a small hit game frequently occurs in a short time in a right-handed game, and the game ball can be increased by the small hit game can be collectively referred to as a "small hit rush". be.

(Types of special games of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment)
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the types of special games of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 32, the jackpot probability of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment is set such that the jackpot probability in the low probability is 1/200, while the jackpot probability in the high probability is set to 1/40. (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Also, the small hit probability is 1/500 in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and 1/2 in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

As an explanation of the types of special games of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 32, "Types of special games" indicates the names of the types of jackpot games and small win games that can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment. It is "State after special game" indicates whether the normal game state to be shifted after the corresponding special game (big win game, small win game) is executed, which state is the specific game or the normal game. "Ratio" indicates the ratio of which type of jackpot game (minor win game) is selected when the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern or the second special pattern results in a big hit or a small hit. ing.

The notation of "special figure 1 _" and "special figure 2 _" described in "type of special game" is either the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) It indicates whether it is the lottery result of the lottery, and "○R" indicates the number of rounds of the corresponding jackpot game. "Variable probability big hit" and "Normal big hit" will shift to variable probability game ("X Rush", "X Rush SUPER") after the big hit game (after the big hit), or shift to time-saving game ("revival chance") (usually after the jackpot) is shown. "Small win" indicates a small winning game, but the configuration has different execution modes of small winning games, such as "small winning_1" and "small winning_2" as the lottery results of the second special symbols. (For example, "small hit _1" is opened once for 0.6 seconds, and "small hit _2" is opened twice for 0.6 seconds).

The content described in the "state after special game" indicates whether to shift to the state of the specific game described in FIG. It should be noted that "depending on the state before the start of the special game" after the "small hit" indicates that the game state is the same as before the start of the special game (the end condition of the specific game is satisfied). When it becomes a "small hit" in the variable display, it shifts to a normal game instead of a specific game).

(Variation pattern table of pachinko game machine P of this embodiment)
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing typical examples of types of variation patterns (variation times) relating to variation display of special symbols of the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment. The vertical axis of FIG. 33 indicates the type of variation pattern, and the horizontal axis of FIG. 33 indicates the type of variation pattern table used in the situation when the variation pattern lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed. The variation pattern shown in FIG. 33 is a representative example, and the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment can also select other types of variation patterns.

The symbols “○”, “△”, and “□” in the figure indicate the approximate frequency of selecting the target fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table, and “○” indicates high frequency (1/3 of the total “△” indicates that it is selected at a low frequency (about 1/20 to 1/50 of the total), and “□” indicates that it is selected at a very low frequency (1/10). 70 to 1/200).

As shown in FIG. 33, the type of the variation pattern table is a game property mainly based on the first special symbol (special figure 1) during the normal game. (“Out (special figure 1) normal game” table). The variation pattern lottery in the first special symbol lottery of the normal game is performed by switching the variation pattern table depending on the number of reserved first special symbols. It should be noted that although the result of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not illustrated, the variation pattern table in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the normal game is a variation dedicated to the special figure 2 A lottery is performed using a pattern table.

On the right side of the "loss (special figure 1) normal game" table, the loss variation pattern during time saving is illustrated. Since the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment is based on the game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the deviation variation pattern table during time saving is used for the variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2). 3 illustrates a variation pattern selected by The variation pattern lottery during time saving of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is determined using a dedicated variation pattern lottery table for time saving special figure 1.

Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern table of "big win" and "minor win" shown as the fluctuation pattern table, it is shown that different fluctuation patterns can be selected depending on the type of the big win game and the type of special symbol at the time of winning the small win. there is

Here, there are two types of SP reach (A reach), "SP reach (A reach)" and "SP reach (A reach) _ role", but "_ role" has a target fluctuation pattern When selected, in the winning/losing branch effect that informs the player whether or not it is a big hit at the end of the reach, the production accessory P560 always operates (the first production operation pattern of the upper role P650, which is a fine accessory). indicates that In the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, in the variable display of the SP reach (A reach) that is the 10R probability variable jackpot that is most advantageous to the player, the effect pattern of executing the action of the upper role P650 is executed. In the case of other big hits, the operation of the upper part P650 is not accompanied (or the execution frequency is extremely low because it is decided by advance notice lottery, and it is possible to operate at timings other than the winning branch effect, such as the development effect to SP reach) ) production pattern is executed. In addition, even in the variation pattern without "_ role", the upper role P650 operates at another timing during the variation display, or the advance notice accompanied by the operation of the side role P670 or the lower role P680 is performed. It is possible to

Also, although not shown, for example, during the execution of the small winning game "X Rush SUPER", the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is either "small winning_1" or "small winning_2". Depending on whether or not, the operation pattern of the lower role P680 (or the side role P670) or the type of the lower role action effect P872 is different in accordance with the small winning game, so that the type of special game (small winning game) won is notified or It may be configured to allow suggestions.

(Execution example of effective production using the production accessories of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment)
Subsequently, in the variable production performed in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the production accessory P560 is used to provide an effective movable accessory production that gives the player a highly interesting production effect. An example of use of the performance accessory P560 will be described along the flow (time chart) of the variable performance during A reach and B reach based on FIGS. 34 to 36 .

The contents shown in each of FIGS. 34 to 36 are as follows.

The “(a) production period” is a rough division of the production period of the variable production according to the content of the production. "Before reach (pseudo 1)" indicates the period from immediately after the start of fluctuation until the first fluctuation display ends or develops into reach production, "Before reach (pseudo 2 ~)" is the pseudo continuous production It is a variable display period of the decorative pattern P801 after the second time during one fluctuation of the special pattern when it is performed, and corresponds to the period until the development of the reach production (since pseudo 3 and later included in the period). Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the normal reach is always executed. The game may end after displaying the losing mode without performing the ready-to-win effect in the display.

Of the "(a) production period", the period indicated by "normal reach" indicates a period in which low-expectation reach production is performed, and the result of the normal reach is used to notify the result of the winning lottery, or the subsequent It is a production period in which the development to the SP reach is notified. The period shown in "SP reach" is a reach production period in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than the above-mentioned normal reach, and it is a production period in which the result of the winning lottery is always notified as a result of the reach production (It should be noted that once lost In this embodiment, this period also includes a performance period called "resurrection performance" or "reversal performance" in which the content of the notification is overturned and the winning is announced).

'(b) Effect content example' shows an example of the content of the effect executed during the corresponding effect period in the above-mentioned '(a) effect period'. It should be noted that the examples shown are merely representative ones, and other notice effects and the like are naturally configured to be executable.

"(c) Example of action of role item" is linked to the effect as shown in "(b) Example of content of effect", and the effect accessory P560 (upper role item P650) provided in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment , side role item P670, and lower role item P680).

"(d) Example of role lamp" is the light emitting part in the production role P560 (upper role P650, side role P670, lower role P680 will be explained as an example) provided in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment. What kind of light emitting effect is executed when a movable role object effect (exemplified in "(c) Example of effect operation"), a notice effect, a prefetch effect, etc. (exemplified in "(b) Example of effect content") is executed It gives an example of what

In "(e) other lamps/sounds_features", what kind of light-emitting effects are produced by the production lamps P82 (frame lamps P350, board lamps P550, and production operation means P81 lamps) other than the light-emitting parts provided in the production accessories P560. It shows an example of whether or not to perform, and an example of sound effects output from the speaker P83.

``(f) button valid period'' is an effect (referred to as ``button effect'') using the effect operation means P81 (effect button P381, lever P382, etc.) during each effect period (see "(a) effect period"). It indicates whether or not a Note that the presence or absence of the button effect depends on the notice effect to be executed, the ready-to-win effect (notice effect during reach, etc.), etc. Therefore, the timing of execution and the presence or absence of execution are not limited to the example shown in the figure.

In the "(f) button effective period", the area shown in black indicates the period during which the operation of the effect operation means P81, which is required to be operated by the player in order to proceed with the effect, is valid. is an effect period in which an image imitating the effect operation means P81 (an operation promoting image such as a button image P881 and a lever image P882) is displayed to prompt the player to perform an input operation to the necessary effect operation means P81. On the other hand, during the shaded period in the figure, the input operation of the predetermined effect operating means P81 determined for the effect is valid, while the button effect is performed without displaying the operation prompting image such as the button image P881. It indicates that it is an effect period (referred to as a “back button effect”) that does not explicitly state that it is a period. The checkered area in the drawing indicates the timing of the win-lose branch effect, which is the effect timing for informing the result of the win/loss lottery among the button effects. In addition, during the back button effect period, the operation promotion image such as the button image P881 is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. to indicate that the operation is valid.

"Back button production" means that if it is executed before reach (pseudo 1), before reach (pseudo 2 ~), or during the period of normal reach, the possibility of development to subsequent high-expectation production such as SP reach It is one of the button effects that are configured to suggest or suggest the degree of expectation for a big win, and are executed as effects for notifying the degree of expectation for a big win when performed during the SP reach.

《SP Reach (A Reach): Lost, small hit》
First, based on FIG. 34, an example of the effect when the variation pattern "SP reach (A reach)" shown in FIG. explain. In addition, the variation pattern "SP reach (A reach)" performed in this explanation will be explained with one variation pattern name, but as a variation effect, "pseudo continuous effect" is performed and multiple times of variable display is performed It can be applied to various variation patterns (variation time) as long as A reach is executed as a final effect, such as whether or not, whether to go through normal reach. As shown in FIG. 33, A reach is a variation effect that can be executed with a variation pattern that is selected even in the case of a big hit. In the case of special figure 2_10R probability variable jackpot), A reach is executed along with the variation pattern of "SP reach (A reach) _ role" in which the upper role P650 always operates in the first effect operation pattern in the winning branch effect be done.

In the following explanation, explanation will be given based on the flow of variable production that develops to SP reach (A reach) via pseudo continuous production and normal reach. In addition, in FIG. 34, examples including various branch patterns described above are given.

When the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to "SP reach (A reach)" is started, a variable effect corresponding to "before reach (pseudo 1)" is displayed as a variable effect in the display area of the effect display device P80. , as examples of the contents of the effect to be executed, a dialogue announcement in which one character or a plurality of characters utter a dialogue, and a variety of images that change in stages (change in shape, size, color, gradual change, etc.) A notice effect decided by lottery is executed at the start of the variable effect, such as a step-up notice to move to). In addition to the effect content that is determined by lottery as the effect content at the start of the variable effect, the prefetch takeover effect (prefetch 1 production pattern of the prefetch production which is the same production as the production and is assigned up to the variable display to be prefetched is executed. In the present embodiment, such a look-ahead takeover effect will also be described as a “pre-read effect” (when explaining the look-ahead effect of only the variable display that is the target of look-ahead, the “look-ahead take-over effect” or “the look-ahead effect” will be described. ”, etc.).

An example of the production operation related to the production accessory P560 in the production period of "before reach (pseudo 1)" is as follows ("(c) production operation example", "(d) role lamp example" in FIG. 34) ).

Superior P650: Does not work. The light-emitting part of the upper role P650 performs an effect in accordance with the advance notice effect or the like. (Fig. 34 shows the case of pseudo 1 ⇒ SP reach (A reach) as another example of variable production)
Side role P670: When the action of the side role P670 is assigned in the effect pattern of the notice effect (dialogue notice, step-up notice, etc.), the action is interlocked. The light-emitting part of the side role P670 emits light in conjunction with the notice performance, but if the side role P670 is used in a look-ahead performance or the like to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit or the degree of expectation of development to reach, the notice Movable accessory performance and light-emitting performance according to the look-ahead performance are executed with priority over other notices, except for a period in which actions are executed in conjunction with the performance.
Lower role P680: When the action of the lower role P680 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous occurrence notification, normal reach development alert, etc.), the action is interlocked. The light-emitting part of the lower role P680 emits light in conjunction with the notice effect, but if the lower role P680 is used in a look-ahead effect, etc., to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit or the degree of expectation for development to reach, the notice Movable accessory performance and light-emitting performance according to the look-ahead performance are executed with priority over other notices, except for a period in which actions are executed in conjunction with the performance.

In the period of "before reach (pseudo 1)", the light emitting part (production lamp P82) other than the production accessory P560 and the speaker P83 are basically decided by lottery decision of the advance notice production as a variable production. A light emission effect and a sound effect are executed according to the execution pattern. In addition, when the pre-reading effect (pre-reading succession effect) is executed at the same time as the advance notice effect in the pre-reading effect etc., the side role is performed in conjunction with the role action effect (side role action effect P871, lower role action effect P872, etc.) Along with the light emitting parts of the object P670 and the lower role P680, in order to effectively show the look-ahead effect using the production role P560, the light-emitting display and sound effect corresponding to the look-ahead effect are executed with priority over the notice effect (or may be executed at the same time).

Also, in the "before reach (pseudo 1)" period, if the execution of the button effect is decided as a lottery result of the notice lottery that determines the content of the variable effect at the start of the variable effect, the button effective period will be changed at the corresponding timing. Occur. The example of FIG. 34 illustrates one button effective period. Depending on the content of the notice effect to be executed, the button effect may be executed multiple times. A plurality of button effective periods may exist by defining the period. (Although not exemplified in FIG. 34, the button validity period may include an advance notice to be executed as a back button effect.)

Next, an example of the effect contents will be described for the effect period of "pre-reach (pseudo 2~)" during the variable effect period of "SP reach (A reach)".

A variable display regarding "SP reach (A reach)" is performed, and when the production of "before reach (pseudo 2 ~)" is approached, the notice that can be executed in "before reach (pseudo 1)" is displayed as the content of the notice production The effect can be executed even in the period of "before reach (pseudo 2-)". In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. is changed, but if there is no such stage change, a similar advance notice effect can be executed in Pseudo 3 as well. In addition, in the effect period of "before reaching (pseudo 2 ~)", a "pseudo-continuous effect" (for example, the display of the effect display device P80 or side effect A display combined with a notice effect using the object P670, a movable accessory effect, etc.), and some prefetching takeover effects (for example, pending change prefetching, zone transition prefetching, etc.) are continued.

An example of the production operation related to the production accessory P560 in the production period of "before reaching (pseudo 2-)" is as follows ("(c) production operation example", "(d) role lamp example in FIG. 34 ).

Superior P650: Does not work. The light-emitting part of the upper role P650 performs an effect in accordance with the advance notice effect or the like. (Fig. 34 shows the case of pseudo 2 ⇒ SP reach (A reach) as another example of variable production)
Side role P670: When the action of the side role P670 is assigned in the effect pattern of the notice effect (dialogue notice, step-up notice, etc.), the action is interlocked. The light-emitting part of the side role P670 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect. In about 2 to 3 seconds immediately after, the effect operation of the pseudo-continuous effect and the light emission effect are preferentially executed. As an example of execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, for example, the side object P670 is shaken for about 2 to 3 seconds immediately after the start of the re-fluctuation, and green (announces a pseudo-2 change) or red (announces a pseudo-3 change) side object. Light-emitting effect by the light-emitting part of P670, or display of side role action effect P871, or the like can be mentioned.
Lower role P680: When the action of the lower role P680 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous occurrence notification, normal reach development alert, etc.), the action is interlocked. The light-emitting part of the lower role P680 emits light in conjunction with the notice effect, but if the lower role P680 is used in a look-ahead effect, etc., to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit or the degree of expectation for development to reach, the notice Movable accessory performance and light-emitting performance according to the look-ahead performance are executed with priority over other notices, except for a period in which actions are executed in conjunction with the performance.

In the period of "before reach (pseudo 2 ~)", the light emitting part other than the production accessory P560 and the speaker P83 are basically determined by the lottery decision of the advance notice production as a variable production, according to the execution pattern of the notice production Executes the lighting effect and the sound effect. In addition, at the start of re-variation, etc., as described above, a pseudo-continuous effect that is a notification that the re-variation has been performed using the side role P670 is performed. In addition, the effect lamp P82 may be configured to execute effect display corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect. In addition, with the hold change look-ahead and zone transition look-ahead, if the light-emitting part other than the performance accessory P560 and the speaker P83 are executing an effect corresponding to the look-ahead effect, the light-emitting effect and sound effect that continue to correspond to the look-ahead effect can be continued.

The occurrence of the button valid period during the period of "Before Reach (Pseudo 2 ~)" is the same as during "Before Reach (Pseudo 1)", depending on the lottery result of the notice lottery at the start of the variable production, once or more times button valid period can occur (one case is illustrated in FIG. 34).

Next, in the variable display in which "SP reach (A reach)" is executed, an example of the effect execution mode in the effect period in which "normal reach" is executed will be described. In this example, since it is a variable display in which development to SP reach (A reach) is executed, the display content of the effect display device P80 during normal reach is an icon image (special design P804) and the like are finally displayed as a result of normal reach.

An example of the effect operation related to the effect accessory P560 during the effect period of "normal reach" is as follows (see "(c) effect operation example" and "(d) role lamp example" in FIG. 34).

High role P650: At the timing when the icon image suggesting development to SP reach (A reach) is displayed, or at the timing after it is displayed, the second production operation pattern (weak pattern) Movable role production is executed. At the same time, the high-ranking object action effect P870 (red) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80.
Side role P670: Performs an effect operation in accordance with the effect content displayed as the reach effect of normal reach. In addition, it does not operate when the corresponding effect operation is not set.
Lower role P680: Performs an effect operation in accordance with the effect content displayed as a normal reach effect. In addition, it does not operate when the corresponding effect operation is not set. Further, when the back button effect is executed, if the back button effect progresses based on the player's input operation to the effect operation means P81, the effect operation corresponding to the back button effect may be executed. In addition, when the performance timing of the accessory action of the ready-to-win effect and the movable accessory effect of the back button effect overlap, the back button effect is preferentially executed.

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the back button effect during normal reach is performed by the player continuously operating (multiple , the light emitting part of the lower role P680 steps up from white to blue to green (> red to gold) and the lower role P680 Execute the "back button step production" that performs a vibration production as a production operation to return to the initial position after a small amount rise The final stage to reach differs depending on the type, but it is configured so that it always reaches green).

During the period of "Before Reach (Pseudo 2-)", the light-emitting parts other than the production accessory P560 and the speaker P83 execute production linked to the content of the Reach production. When execution of the back button effect is scheduled during the ready-to-win effect, the effect lamp of the frame lamp 350 (the effect operation unit P380) is caused to emit light in a manner indicating that the effect operation means P81 is effective. When the player operates the effect operation means P81 during the execution of the back button effect, the light emitting part provided in the lower role P680 executes the light emitting effect of the back button step-up effect. It may be configured to emit light simultaneously with the disk lamps 550 provided in the periphery for heightening.

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, when the step-up effect is executed based on the back button step-up, even after the back button step-up effect during normal reach is completed, the luminous display in the finally reached luminescent color is displayed. , It is possible to continue to display until the subsequent performance timing. More specifically, in the back button step-up production during normal reach, it is configured to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variation, and the notice production (cut-in It is possible to continuously display the final light emission mode of the back button step-up as the degree of expectation for a big hit until the timing of the announcement) and the timing of the winning branch effect. By doing so, the player can confirm the display mode of the back button step-up as one reference information as to whether the result will be a big win when executing the SP reach, thereby improving the interest of the SP reach performance. leads to In addition, as a modification, from the final lighting mode of the back button step-up, in conjunction with the chance-up effect during SP reach, the light-emitting part of the lower role P680 is changed to a light-emitting color corresponding to the expectation of a higher jackpot. The light emission mode may be configured to be changeable.

The occurrence of the button valid period during the "Normal Reach" period can be set to the period corresponding to the back button step-up effect as described above, or the timing to notify the result of the subsequent Normal Reach (big hit notification or development notification to SP Reach). is. As described above, the lower role P680 is a role that interferes with the side role P670 and the upper role P650. However, as another method, only the lower role P680 can be operated during the back button step production period, and the side role P670 and the upper role P670 are configured to be operable. The effect content may be configured so that no effect action is assigned to P650.

Finally, the contents of the effect executed during the effect period of "SP reach" in the effect period of "SP reach (A reach)" will be explained. In "SP reach (A reach)", during SP reach, part of the background effect of the reach effect is configured to be different from the normal pattern (pattern with the lowest expectation among the effect patterns of A reach). A chance-up notice that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high, a cut-in notice that characters and lines are superimposed on the background production of the reach production, and the result of the lottery will inform you whether the result is a big hit. It is a period in which various effects such as a button effect performed at the timing of the win-lose branch effect can be executed in a complex manner.

An example of the effect operation related to the effect accessory P560 during the effect period of "SP reach" is as follows (see "(c) effect operation example" and "(d) role lamp example" in FIG. 34).

Higher role P650: Does not work (because the lottery results are lost and it is a small hit). In addition, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit other than the 10R probability variable big hit, when the execution of the button production is determined as a result of the lottery, the upper role P650 is operated in the first production operation pattern. can be configured to
Side role P670: When the action of the side role P670 is assigned in the effect pattern of the notice effect (chance-up notice during SP reach), the action is interlocked. The light emitting part of the side role P670 emits light (red light emission, and as a modification, white light emission in the case of the effect in which the surrounding board lamp 550 emits red light) in conjunction with the advance notice effect. When operating the side role P670, side role P670L close to the part where the chance up notice different from the normal pattern is displayed in part of the background effect during SP reach so that attention is directed to the chance up notice, One of R may be configured to operate.
Lower role article P680: When the action of the lower role article P680 is assigned in the effect pattern of the notice effect (notice of cut-in during SP reach), the action is interlocked. The light-emitting part of the lower role P680 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect (for example, in the case of a green cut-in, the light-emitting part of the lower role P680 emits green light, and the green lower role action effect P872 is displayed, In the case of red cut-in, the light-emitting part of the lower role P680 emits red light, and the performance display of the red lower role action effect P872 is performed). In addition, when the back button step effect is executed in advance during normal reach, etc., the light emitting part of the lower role P680 continues to display the final light emitting mode of the back button step effect until the timing of the winning branch effect. It is configured to give priority to light emission display. As a modified example, for example, in the back button step production, when the light emitting part of the lower role P680 emits green light as the final light emitting mode, when a red cut-in notice occurs, the expectation is higher. A red display suggesting that is displayed according to the execution of the advance notice effect, and then the red light emission mode is continued without returning to the light emission mode corresponding to the green back button step effect until the win-lose branch effect. You may

The occurrence of the button effective period in the period of "SP reach" can be configured to be performed when the button presentation is executed when the notice of cut-in occurs or other notice presentation (chance-up notice, etc.) occurs. Also, the cut-in notice and other notice effects during SP reach may be configured as back button effects. Note that this example (see "(f) button valid period" in FIG. 34) is SP reach (A reach) in the case of a miss or a small hit, and is configured so that the button effect is not determined as a win-lose branch effect. .

《SP reach (A reach) _ role: big hit》
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 35, the contents of the variation effect when "SP reach (A reach)_role" is determined among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 33 will be described. The variation pattern "SP reach (A reach) _ role" is a variation pattern that can be determined in the case of 10R probability variation (special figure 1_10R probability variation big hit, special figure 2_10R probability variation big hit), and the contents of the variation production are shown in FIG. Since it is almost the same as the case of "SP reach (A reach)", only the characteristic differences will be explained.

35 and the example of FIG. 34, the contents of effects that can be executed before the start of "SP reach" are the same. In the example of FIG. 35, the biggest difference is that during the "SP reach (A reach)" effect period, the button effect (win-lose branch button effect) is always executed (that is, the advance notice lottery at the start of the variable effect A special period is set before and after the effective period of the winning/losing branch button presentation is started, and further, the upper role P650 operates in the winning/losing branch presentation in order to notify the big hit. It differs from the production example of FIG. 34 in that it operates based on the operation of the production operation means P81.

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the variation pattern "SP reach (A reach) _ role" is a variation pattern that can be determined in the case of 10R probability variation (special figure 1_10R probability variation big hit, special figure 2_10R probability variation big hit) Furthermore, in order to congratulate the player on winning the jackpot, the upper role P650 (textile role) is always operated in the variation performance performed when the variation pattern is determined, and the performance effect is further enhanced. In order to increase the performance, the operation start of the upper role P650 is configured to be the operation timing for the presentation operation means P81 of the button presentation (win-lose branch button presentation). In the case of other types of jackpots, the variation pattern "SP reach (A reach)" is one of the results that can be selected, so even if A reach is executed, unless the lottery is won, the winning branch button production is configured so that it does not occur.

The action of the superior object P650 in the win-lose split effect is executed according to the first effect operation pattern. The action effect P870 is displayed in rainbow colors. In addition, in the example of FIG. 34, the pattern in which the boss P650 operates in other types of jackpots was also mentioned, but in the case of other types of jackpots, it is different from when the 10R probability variable jackpot is won. In order to achieve this, as the effect content, the upper role object P650 may be configured to operate according to the second effect operation pattern instead of the first effect operation pattern. The object action effect P870 may be configured to emit light and display in other modes (modes other than rainbow colors).

In a special period provided before and after the start of the button valid period of the win-lose branch button presentation, the operation of the presentation accessory P560 which has been in a movable state until then is stopped (returned to the initial position or stopped on the spot), and the board lamp P550. , The light emitting parts of the frame lamp P350 and the production accessory P560 are turned off (or dimmed until dark), and the sound production from the speaker P83 (at least the sound production corresponding to the reach production) is temporarily stopped, and the production display device P80 The display in is blackout display (display of a black screen, notification of the fact that it is fluctuating with a simple installation pattern P802, a retreat pattern P803, etc.), making the pachinko game machine P dark and quiet, and button images according to the button valid period It is configured to display an operation prompting image such as P881.

After the start of the special period, when the player operates the effect operation means P81 during the button effective period of the win-lose branch button effect, the action effect of the upper role P650 is started, and the ready-to-win effect is produced. It is configured such that the light emission effect of the effect lamp P82 and the sound effect of the speaker P83 are restored.

In this way, in the variable production corresponding to "SP reach (A reach)" _ role", before the first production operation pattern (texture operation) of the upper role P650 (texture role), a quiet period (interest period) By providing the above, it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the action of the upper role P650 and the execution of the button performance, and to further enhance the effect of the action of the upper role P650. can be done.

Note that the "special period" is not limited to dimming the effect lamp P82 of the pachinko game machine P and limiting the sound effect of the speaker P83 as described above, but also lighting the effect lamp P82 in a uniform color, A special sound effect may be emitted from the speaker P83. Any mode may be used as long as it makes it easy to draw attention to the texture.

In addition, the "special period" is the variation pattern "SP reach (A reach)", and when another type of jackpot is notified by the winning branch button production (at the start of the variable production, the winning branch button production will be It may be executed when it is determined to be executed), and by doing so, it is possible to prevent the "occurrence of a special period", that is, the "10R probability variable jackpot". In addition, the "special period" for attracting attention to the action of the production accessory P560 does not necessarily have to be a button production, and the normal reach and the period before reach (pseudo 1) and before reach (pseudo 2) Period), etc., may be provided in order to draw attention to the superior material P650 immediately before the development of the SP reach is notified by the superior material P650 (texture material). At this time, the superior object P650 is caused to vibrate slightly and the superior object P650 is displayed on the display of the effect display device P80 which is blacked out so as to attract attention to the superior object P650. A preparatory operation may be performed to flash the light-emitting portion of the .

《B Reach: Hit》
Next, an example of the content of the variation effect executed when the variation pattern "SP reach (B reach)" shown in FIG. 33 is selected will be described based on FIG. Here, first, if the outline of "B reach" is briefly explained, "B reach" is a directing "missing" mode in normal reach and SP reach assigned with low expectations. It is one of the types of SP reach, which is called "lever chance" that develops after being played, in which a big hit is notified if the upper role P650 operates by operating the production lever P382.

In the production example of FIG. 36, a case is exemplified in which, after "loss" is announced once in normal reach, the game shifts to B reach (lever chance), and B reach becomes a success mode, and a big win is announced.

In FIG. 36, there is almost no difference from the aforementioned "A reach" in the presentation periods of "before reach (pseudo 1)" and "before reach (pseudo 2-)". The difference is that the B reach is after the notification of the loss in the normal reach and the SP reach, which is set to a lower degree of expectation, so that "before reach (pseudo 1)" and "before reach (pseudo 2 ~ )” is constructed so as not to suggest the development from the action of the boss P650 to the high-expectation SP reach (A reach, etc.). Since the other details are the same as those of the A reach, the explanation is omitted.

Next, an example of an effect executed in the effect period "normal reach" in which the variation pattern "SP reach (B reach)" is executed will be described.

When the variable effect related to "SP reach (B reach)" is being performed, in normal reach, the withdrawal pattern P803 during reach is displayed in the corner of the effect display device P80, while the effect display device P80 is an abbreviation of the effect display device P80. A changing decorative pattern P801 (final stop pattern) is variably displayed in the central area. In the row of decorative symbols serving as final stop symbols, in addition to decorative symbols of the kind used as ready-to-win retreat symbols, there are cases where an icon image or the like indicating development of SP ready-to-win is displayed as a special symbol. Then, the fluctuation speed of the decorative pattern row, which is the last stop pattern in the vicinity of the retracted pattern during the reach and the patterns before and after it, or the special pattern (icon image), is reduced, and it is notified whether the reach will be a big hit (reach retreat) A winning mode in which the symbol and the final stop symbol are the same, or a losing mode in which the symbol and the final stop symbol are different combinations), and a notification related to SP reach development (stopping the icon image as the final stop symbol) are executed. In addition, in this example, in order to explain an example of shifting to lever chance after notification of loss of normal reach, it is assumed here that normal reach ends in a loss mode, but B reach (lever chance) with special symbols such as icon images ).

In this production example, when the normal reach ends in a lost state, as shown in FIG. A rattling motion of repeating up and down movements is performed, and a superior object action effect P870 is displayed in the vicinity of the superior object P650. Then, in the vicinity of the stop display area of the decorative pattern P801 of the effect display device P80, a simulated role product action image P874 relating to the upper role product P650 is faded-in displayed (transmittance is lowered so as to be clearly visible). The effect of fading out display (display that changes so as to increase the transmittance and disappear slowly) is repeated multiple times, and as a result of changing and displaying the simulated role object action image P874 multiple times in this way, it is finally clearly displayed. In this case, a shift to B reach (lever chance) is notified, and in the case of a miss, the simulated role product action image P874 is not displayed, and a variation effect is performed by a stop display of a miss mode of the decorative pattern P801. finish. Whether or not the pseudo-accessory action image P874 is displayed in this way, and the effect of arousing the transition to B reach (lever chance) by the movable effect action of the target superior role object P650 is referred to as "lever chance occurrence instigation".

When executing the "lever chance generation fanning", it is configured to display the superior object action effect P870 together with the rattling motion of the superior object P650. It may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation for development of B reach (lever chance) depending on the luminescent color and display mode of the character action effect P870. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a hit, the light emitting part of the upper role P650 during the lever chance generation and the light emission mode and display mode of the upper role action effect P870 are displayed in rainbow colors. By temporarily (instantaneously) mixing light emission and display, it has a rare premium production pattern that allows you to sense the winning of a big hit at the timing before the timing of the winning branch production during B reach (lever chance). may be configured.

In addition, in the "lever chance occurrence fanning", at the time of repeating the fade-in display and fade-out display of the pseudo role product action image P874, the pseudo role product action image P874 is displayed in grayscale, and finally B reach (lever chance ), the simulated role product action image P874 is configured to be displayed in color. A single color gradation display of the red system may be performed on the display screen, or a premium pattern including rainbow color display may be provided. In addition, in the repeated display before the final display of the simulated role object action image P874, not only the display method of fade-in display/fade-out display, but also other methods such as slide-in depending on the degree of expectation for development of B reach (lever chance) or a combination of multiple patterns.

Also, in the "normal reach" period executed during the variable production of "SP reach (B reach)", if the side role P670 and the lower role P680 are assigned a movable production operation to the reach production, the assignment The action is performed in accordance with the performance action pattern set. As for the lower role P680, the effect operation and light emission effect based on the back button effect are assigned in the same manner as in the case of "SP reach (A reach)". However, even if the back button step-up is executed as the back button effect of the lower role P680, in the case of "SP reach (B reach)", the normal reach will temporarily stop display in the mode of removing the decorative pattern P801 ( When the temporary stop display is performed, the light emission display of the final light emission mode of the back button step effect is terminated before the execution of the lever chance generation bias. This is effective as a highly entertaining ready-to-win effect by suggesting the possibility that the player will win in reverse from the fact that the player is discouraged by being notified in a dramatic manner that the lever chance occurrence fanning is once lost. If the light-emitting display based on the back button step effect continues on the light-emitting part of the lower role P680, the effect of the lever chance occurrence will be diluted (development to B reach (lever chance) is perceived. This is because

Next, an example of the effect contents during the effect period "SP reach" in the variation effect in the variation pattern "SP reach (B reach)", the specific effect contents of B reach (lever chance) will be described.

B reach (lever chance) is, as shown in FIG. 38 (an example of the timing shown in the special period (B) in FIG. 36), when the normal reach is completed and the lever chance generation is successful, B reach (lever chance) After the start of , the production lever P382 (frame movable accessory P360) changes to a state in which input is possible (see FIG. 27(b)), and a production display prompting the player to operate the production lever P382 is performed. At this time, the variable display is started again from the display of the losing mode at the end of the normal reach, and if displayed, the decorative pattern P801 (“3” in FIG. 38), which will be a big hit, is displayed together with the simulated role product action image P874. An effect display is performed to crush the decorative pattern P801 (“2” in FIG. 38). Then, when the player operates the production lever P382, the upper role P650 performs the production operation (second production operation pattern), and crushes the missing decorative pattern P801 to indicate a successful mode (see FIG. 38). , only "3" is displayed, and the combination of Zome is displayed). Instead of the combination of the decorative pattern P801 and the simulated role product action image P874, instead of the simulated role product action image P874, the upper role object P650 is configured to rattle at the upper position of the decorative pattern P801. good too.

During B reach (lever chance), the supporting role P670 and the lower role P680 do not have a pattern for performing a movable effect action, and are configured to wait at the initial position, and the light emitting part emits light. The mode is also configured to emit light according to the ready-to-win effect.

The effect lever P382 becomes effective at the timing of the win-lose divergence button effect during B reach (lever chance). A preparatory operation is performed before the effective period of the effect operation means P81 (effect lever P382) for the win-lose branch button effect. B reach (lever chance) is a production intended to notify a big hit by a movable production operation of the upper role P650 based on the operation of the production lever P382. When performing the preparatory operation of the lever P382, the frame lamp P350 is configured to move toward the direction of the production lever P382 and light up in order, so as to draw attention to the production lever P382. ing. On the other hand, the board lamp P550 is lit up in a moving manner so that the light-emitting portion sequentially moves toward the superior object P650.

Then, in accordance with the timing at which the preparatory operation of the effect lever P382 is completed, the effective period of the effect operation means P81 and the special period are generated. ”, the lighting mode of the production lamp P82 of the pachinko game machine P is extinguished and dimmed (except for the production lever P382 and the boss P650), and at least part of the sound production output from the speaker P83 is stopped, and the production lever image P882 is displayed on the production display device together with the character string "Drop the upper role!!" Configure to focus on action.

(Priority of display layer of pachinko game machine of this embodiment)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, the priority of display regarding the display of various effects displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 39 shows an example of an effect screen during variable display of special symbols in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, and FIG. 40 shows the display priority of various effect displays.

FIG. 39 shows an effect display example during execution of the variable effect of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment. In the display area of the effect display device P80, an image of two female characters walking along the road is displayed as the background image P876, and in the example of FIG. 39, a black figure is displayed as the character appearance notice P877. (Note that, at this time, the two female characters in the background image P876 are also performing actions for character appearance notice, so the background image P876 is switched to an image in which the two female characters do not exist, and the character appearance notice (showing two images).

Then, in the effect display example shown in FIG. 39, a line notice P878 (a line of "Who!?" The lower role object action effect P872 is displayed in the vicinity of the lower role object P680 with priority over the dialogue notice P878 (at this time, the lower role object P680 is displayed in a movable production action when the character appearance notice P877 switches from the figure to the character display. (Because it is set to perform a preparatory or inciting action).

Also, a button image P881 is displayed in the vicinity (below) of the dialogue notice P878 to prompt the player to operate the effect operation means P81. In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, in order to surely prompt the player to operate the effect operation means P81, the operation promotion images (the button image P881 and the lever image P882) are provided with the role object action effect (lower role action effect P872). ) is given priority over

In FIG. 39, as other displayed objects, there are a decorative pattern P801 and a simplified design P802 for dramatically showing the lottery result of the special pattern during variable display. In addition, as a display for displaying necessary information for the player that is not directly related to the current variable display, a hold display object P811 and a simple hold P814 relating to hold, a split notification image P830, a display of the cumulative number of wins P824, and the like are displayed. it's shown.

FIG. 40 shows the level of priority set in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment (that is, allocation of display layers, with respect to various effects and other effects shown in FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing that the higher the height, the more likely it is to be visually recognized by the player and drawn on the display layer). In the following, the display contents will be described in order from the lowest priority by way of example.

《Background effect》
In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, "background effect" is set to have the lowest priority as the effect display contents displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. "Background effect" is often displayed for the purpose of the player to understand the effect stage (production mode), and the scenery, characters, and objects are displayed as animations, and special patterns are displayed in a variable manner. This effect image can be continuously displayed even if there is no such effect image. In addition, the ``background effect'' may not be visible due to the game standby demo display that shifts due to the continuation of the period in which the variable display of special symbols is not performed, the notice effect that displays the full screen, the big hit effect, etc.

《Notice》
In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, most of the image display of the notice effect is set to have a low display priority next to the background effect. As shown in FIG. 40, in the notice effect, a plurality of types of notices are set with different priorities. are displayed at the same time, it is determined which display should be given priority. According to the example described with reference to FIG. 39, the character appearance notice P877 corresponds to "notice 1" and the dialog notice P878 corresponds to "notice 2". It is designed to be

《Look-Ahead / Pseudo Continuous Performance》
In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect and the pseudo-continuous effect (the effect of displaying "x2" or the like at the start of the re-variation) are displayed over a plurality of times of the variable display on the effect. It has an important role of notifying that the expectation of a big hit is increasing (pre-reading effect) and that the expectation of a big win is increasing due to the development of a pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display during execution. Therefore, it has a higher priority than most teaser images. Note that there are exceptional prefetch effects that do not apply to the display priority, such as pending change prefetch displayed as a pending display.

《Character movement effect》
In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, when the forewarning effect accompanied by the action of the effect accessory P560, the look-ahead effect, or the pseudo-continuous effect occurs, the degree of expectation for the big hit is relatively higher than when the effect accessory P560 is not operated. Designed to be high. Therefore, the display of the role action effects (higher role action effect P870, side role action effect P871, lower role action effect P872, role full screen effect P873, etc.) emphasizing the action of the production role P560 is By increasing the priority of display over images, look-ahead effects, pseudo-continuous effects, etc., and preventing the role object action effects from being hidden by these effect displays, it is easy to attract attention to the movable effect action of the effect role P560. It's like By constructing the action of the performance accessory P560 so as to easily attract attention in this way, it is possible to effectively notify the player that an event advantageous to the player is approaching, such as an increase in expectations for a big hit of the performance accessory P560. It becomes possible to notify.

<Direction assistance display>
"Production assistance display" is a stage name display that informs the player that the production stage (production mode) has changed for a few seconds at the timing when the production stage (production mode) is switched, and characters, etc. during the reach production. Auxiliary display such as telop display for displaying words corresponds to this. These displays are display objects that can be displayed only in a narrow display area at a very short timing (timing at which the voice is output from the speaker P83) when the characters in reach speak their lines when the presentation mode is switched. On the other hand, the display can be used as an advance notice to inform the player of the content of the production or to indirectly inform the expectation of the big win (for example, the display color of the telop characters can be configured so that the expectation of the big win is different). In order to improve the visibility when displayed as much as possible, the priority is set higher than the notice and character action effects.

《Decorative pattern》
"Decorative pattern" (decorative pattern P801) is an important display object for notifying the result of the special pattern lottery of the special pattern, so the display priority is set so that it is not hidden by the notice display or the action effect of the special symbol. configured to increase. In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, during the high-speed fluctuation period during the variable display of the decorative pattern P801, the transmittance of the display of the decorative pattern P801 is increased so that it is hardly visible to the player, and the display priority is high from the player's point of view. It is possible to visually recognize displays such as various advance notice effects that are set lower than the decorative patterns.

Regarding the display of the decorative pattern P801, instead of changing the transmittance to make it easier to visually recognize the notice etc., the decorative pattern P801 being changed (low display priority) and the decorative pattern P801 being stopped (display By configuring the display priority of (high priority) to be different, the visibility of the changing decorative pattern P801 may be made lower than that of the notice effect or the like.

《Custom display (menu screen, volume/light intensity adjustment)》
In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the menu screen (customized effect screen) for the player to arbitrarily select the effect mode, the volume output from the speaker P83, the brightness and color of the effect lamp P82, etc. are adjusted. It is possible to execute a custom display for adjusting the effect during the game, such as a sound volume/light quantity adjustment display for adjusting the light quantity and an automatic operation mode setting for setting the operation mode of the effect operation means to automatic operation. These custom displays include those that can be displayed even during the variable display of decorative patterns, and can be adjusted and set even during execution of advance notice and the like.

In addition, at the timing of displaying important information on the game result, such as the stop display of the decoration symbol P801 mentioned above, or during the period when high expectations are being reached, the display of the custom display is prohibited and switched to non-display. It can be constructed in such a way that the information necessary for the player can be easily visually recognized. In addition, "custom display" is information that has little relevance to effects such as advance notice effects, so it is possible to freely switch the display position different from the normal position displayed by default. When part of the image display area is covered by the operation of P560, the custom display to be displayed (or scheduled to be displayed) in the area can be configured to change the display position to ensure visibility.

《Total acquisition number display》
"Accumulated Winning Number Display" is a display section that displays the accumulated number of game balls won by the player during the period in which the specific game state and the big win game (or small win game) are repeatedly executed, that is, the so-called continuous game period. be. In addition to the accumulated winning number display P824, a round display P820 that displays the current number of rounds during the jackpot game, a jackpot icon P821 that indicates the number of times the jackpot has been executed, and the number of jackpot winning balls that displays the number of balls won during one jackpot. The display P823, the count display P825 indicating the number of balls that have entered the big winning hole during one round of the big win, etc. are set to have the same display priority.

《Holding display》
"Reserved display" is the reserved object P811 of the reserved display area P810 and the reserved object P813 of the reserved object display area P812. This is a display area for effectively displaying the pending number of symbol lottery and the pending display corresponding to the random number value used for the current variable display. It is distinguished from the simple hold display P814 described later, and in the "hold display", the effect display (for example, hold change directing, etc.) can be executed. The pending display may become difficult to see due to the effect display displayed as the special notice when the special notice with a high display priority, which will be described later, is executed. The display priority of the pending display area P810 and the pending object display area P812 is different, for example, the display priority of the pending object display area P812 is set higher than the special notice, and the special notice (reaching While the pending display area P810 becomes invisible due to a blackout, etc.), by continuing the display of the pending object display area P812 corresponding to the change in which the special notice is being performed, the degree of expectation of the special notice is held and whether or not the change is implemented can be determined. It is also possible to indirectly notify by displaying the pending object P813 as a result of inclusion in a complex manner.

《Special notice (e.g. blackout display, result production, etc.》
"Special notice" is a special notice of the above-mentioned SP reach (A reach), such as a blackout during the special period, for the player to draw attention to the effect (especially the content of the subsequent effect display), and other SP reach that you want to emphasize. This is a performance display of a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol which is displayed with priority over other display objects in order to concentrate on a specific notice such as a middle performance. In addition, if you want to change the display mode of the pending display due to the effect display for displaying the game result such as the result effect that is executed at the timing of the final change of the time saving game, or the stage change effect, etc. It may be set as a special notice with high priority.

Although not shown, as the display priority of such a special notice, the display priority is set higher than the character action effect, and the notice display corresponding to the change, the look-ahead, and the character action effect are not displayed. Alternatively, a medium-priority notice may be set such that the display such as the display of the cumulative number of acquisitions is set to a display priority that is continuously visible.

In addition, as a modification, among the above-described role product motion effects, the role product full-screen effect P873 (rainbow color) for notifying a big hit using the superior role product P650 (textile role product) is suspended. It may be configured to set a display priority equivalent to that of the special notice because interest in the display or the like is reduced.

《Operation promotion image (button image)》
The "operation prompting image (button image)" prompts the player to operate the effect operation means P81 in order to switch the effect of the variable effect being executed, and is used to set the above-mentioned custom display selection contents. It is an image that guides the operation method, and since it is a highly necessary display, a high display priority is set so that it is not hidden behind other displays. It should be noted that it is configured such that it is displayed at a position that does not necessarily overlap display items with a higher display priority, such as simple layouts and simple reserves, which will be described later, or that the timing of display is not the same.

《Simple Hold》
"Simple hold" is a display related to the number of holds displayed in a display area different from the hold display area P810, which is the hold display described above, and the first special symbol and the second special regardless of the production stage (production mode) It is a display showing the display of the number of reserved symbols by numbers, symbols, or the like. The display of "simple hold" is positioned as important information (important UI) for the player, and can always be visualized even when performing a special effect such as a special notice.

《Breakout notification》
The "beating notification" (beating notification image P830) is a display that indicates to the player the position where it is recommended that the game ball should be shot at present. Right-handed small display P832, left-handed small display P834, right-handed attention alert notification P835, and left-handed attention attention alert notification P836 are assigned as. The large right-handed display P831 and the large left-handed display P833 are dramatic displays that are displayed when the game state changes (for example, during the demo period when a big hit starts, or when a specific game (time reduction) starts or ends), and is a special display. It is handled (display priority) almost the same as the notice.

《Simple layout》
"Simple design" (simple design P802) is a display that indicates that the special design is being displayed in a variable display by its variable display, and notifies the lottery result of the special design by the stop display mode, and the decorative design P801 is It is designed to be displayed as one of the important UIs so that variable display and static display can always be performed even in situations where it cannot be visually recognized. During the special game (especially the big win game), the variable display of the special symbols is not performed, and the display of the big win performance may be switched to non-display in order to give the player a sense of happiness. During the small winning, only the variable display of the special symbols is interrupted, so that the display is not hidden even during the special game (during the small winning game), and the display is stopped during the small winning game. If you do, it will be misidentified as a game result, so even if the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted, the variable display of the simple design P802 can be continued (the symbol is switched as a variable display). However, it is also possible to execute the shaking fluctuation during the execution period of the small winning game, that is, during the interruption of the fluctuation display of the special symbol).

Also, one or two simple layouts P802 are displayed depending on the game characteristics of the gaming machine (gaming machine specifications, specs). For example, in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) preferential digestion control or incoming ball order digestion control, only one special symbol is always displayed in a variable display, so only one simple display P802 is required, but parallel control In this case, since there is a possibility that the two special symbols may perform variable display, it is preferable to also display the simplified design P802 in two places. It should be noted that even in the parallel control, only the special symbols designed as the subject of the game may be displayed as the simple layout P802 according to the production stage (production mode).

"error indication"
In addition, although not shown in FIG. 40, it is preferable that the error display when an error occurs in the gaming machine is configured so that it can be visually recognized under any circumstances. set. In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, the display priority is set higher than the important UIs 1 to 3, such as simple hold, split notification, and simple layout, but each display position is set to a position that does not overlap. Therefore, even if the order of display priority is changed, there is practically no effect.

Note that if the right-handed and left-handed caution alert notifications P835 and left-handed caution alert notifications P836 are designed with large images, there is a risk that they may overlap with the error image. It is preferable to set the lowest priority among the important UI and the error display.

(Production stage characterized by the action of the production accessory of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment)
Next, "X Rush SUPER", which is a production stage (production mode) characterized by the operation of the production accessory P560 of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, will be described. "X Rush SUPER" is a production stage (production mode) corresponding to the game state of variable probability game (high probability/low base) shown in FIG. Since the operation mode is a non-electric chew support state, by shooting the game ball to the right side game area P501R, the ball enters the big winning opening P751 arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory P770 during the small winning game. is easy. Therefore, in "X Rush SUPER", it is a game state in which the number of game balls gradually increases due to winning in the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game even if the big winning is not won (referred to as "small winning rush").

As shown in FIG. 32, in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the second special symbol, the probability of winning a small hit is as high as 1/2, and the small win is frequently won. In the mode) "X Rush SUPER", the same type of decorative pattern (for example, not a grid pattern but the same display color is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 in order to visually notify the winning of the small prize. and a special pattern for announcing a small hit) are stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the lower part P680 is made to rise. In addition, the effect of notifying that you have won a small hit in the special symbol lottery of such a second special symbol is performed only in "X Rush SUPER", and other right-handed strokes such as "X Rush" and "Resurrection Chance" In the performance stage (performance mode) where the game is recommended, it is not executed even if a small win is won in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

In "X Rush SUPER", different operation patterns are set for the lower role P680 depending on the type of small winning game won in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 32, there are two types of small winning symbols of the second special symbol, "special figure 2_small winning_1" and "special figure 2_small winning_2", and "special figure 2_small winning_1" is present. The big winning opening P751 is opened once for 0.6 seconds, and "special figure 2_small hit_2" is a small winning game in which the big winning opening P751 is opened twice for 0.6 seconds. That is, the player is more likely to get more prize balls when winning the "special figure 2_small win_2", which is advantageous. Therefore, as the operation pattern of the lower role P680 when notifying that a small hit has been won in "X Rush SUPER", the effect operation pattern for "special figure 2_small hit_1" and the "special figure 2_small hit _2” are prepared.

In the effect operation pattern for "special figure 2_small hit_1", the lower role article P680 rises to the rising position sensor P687 and immediately returns to the position of the falling position sensor P686, and the position of the rising position sensor P687 , the light-emitting part of the lower role P680 emits white light, and a small white lower role action effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the performance display device P80. On the other hand, in the effect operation pattern for "special figure 2_small win_2", the lower role object P680 moves to a position detected by the rising position sensor, and in the process, the lower role object P680 emits white light from the light emitting part and produces an effect. Until the display of the lower role object action effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the display device P80, the lower role object P680 is the same, while the lower role object P680 returns to the lowered position sensor P686 and rises to the position detected by the raised position sensor again. At the same time, the light-emitting part of the lower role P680 is caused to emit red light, and a large red lower role action effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80.

In addition, as a special effect operation pattern of the lower role P680 in "X Rush SUPER", when a small hit is won continuously in multiple special symbol lotteries (preliminary judgment information Or, it is determined by checking the pre-determination information for the suspension of the second special symbol that will occur later), the above-mentioned "special figure 2 _ small hit _ 1" effect operation pattern or "special figure 2 _ small hit _ 2" for A small winning game is executed a plurality of times while moving to the position detected by the rising position sensor without performing the returning operation (returning operation to the initial position) to the lowered position sensor P686 in the production operation pattern. In the meantime, the light-emitting part of the lower part P680 emits light in gold (a light emission pattern in which yellow, white, and orange are mixed), and a large golden motion effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the performance display device P80. ' is executable. In this way, the production operation pattern of the lower role P680 and the display contents of the production display device P80 are changed according to the types of small winning games with different profits and the determination of the number of consecutive small winning games using the prior determination information, Even if a small win is frequently won, the notification of the small win is not monotonous, and a performance that gives a sense of expectation for the game profit (number of game balls) that may be awarded. can be executed.

In the case of a big hit in "X Rush SUPER", in the same way as in the production stage (production mode) corresponding to other game states, when notifying the acquisition of the big hit with the action of the production accessory P560, the boss It is configured to use the object P650. Here, in the "X Rush SUPER", if the interval between the small winning games (variation display period of the second special symbol for each time) becomes longer, the ball feeling based on the acquisition of the game ball by the small winning game (a large amount of games Since the feeling of getting the ball) fades, in the variable game, which is a game state (high probability / low base) corresponding to "X Rush SUPER", the electric chew support function is not activated, but the special pattern The variable time shortening function of is in an operating state, and the variable display of the second special symbol is configured so that a short-time variation is likely to be selected. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, even when a big win is achieved in "X Rush SUPER", the variation time is set to be shorter than when a big win is achieved in other game states. (Except for exceptional jackpot notification effects, a variable effect accompanied by the action of the superior object P650 is always selected.) ing).

By adopting the operation mode of the performance role P560 in such "X rush SUPER", in "X rush SUPER", the player can "win big when the upper role P650 operates" and "play the lower role P680." You can enjoy the feeling and performance of the small winning game and the big winning game with a simple and easy-to-understand game performance with the feeling of "getting a small hit".

As a modification of the "X Rush SUPER", a 2R jackpot or a 4R jackpot in which an opening pattern (0.6 seconds x 5) having a opening time of the jackpot opening that is substantially the same as the small jackpot is executed in a plurality of rounds. A big hit is provided as a result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and when these big hits are won, the operation of the lower role P680 is performed in the same way as when the small prize is won instead of the upper role P650 (described above). A ``special performance operation pattern'' performed over a plurality of small winning games is executed, and configured to appear as if winning a plurality of small winnings in spite of the big winning. You may

(Modified example of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment)
<<Modification 1>>
In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the effect display device P80 and the effect operation pattern of the superior role P650 (textile role) during the ready-to-win effect are used to notify the effect that the hit is a big hit. It has been explained that it is a pachinko game machine that provides a highly entertaining presentation that combines the actions of the object P560.

Here, as a modified example, depending on the type of effect operation pattern of the upper role P650 (texture role) during the ready-to-win effect, the degree of advantage in the special game (the number of winning balls, the number of winning balls, and the transition after the big hit game It may be configured to be able to make suggestions regarding the type of specific game).

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the "10R probability variable big hit" shown in FIG. At the position, the rotating decorative part P652 is expanded, the side role P670 is expanded behind the upper role P650, and the character full screen effect P873 is displayed in rainbow colors in the display area of the effect display device P80. (The light-emitting portion of the superior article P650 emits light in a color corresponding to the full-screen effect P873).

Here, as a modified example, as a pattern that suggests the type of special game by the performance action pattern of the superior role P650, in the case of a 4R probability variable big hit (or some 10R probability variable big hit), the superior role P650 is produced. While deploying the rotating decoration part P652 at the position, the side role P670 is not deployed behind the upper role P650, and the red role full screen effect P873 is displayed in the display area of the production display device P80 (upper A pattern for executing the medium-expectation mode in which the light-emitting part of the character P650 emits light in a color corresponding to the full-screen effect P873 may be prepared. In addition, in the case of a 10R normal jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot (or a partial 10R variable or 4R variable jackpot) with a low expectation of profit that can be given to the player, the upper role P650 is placed in the second effect operation pattern ( It is also possible to prepare a pattern for executing a low expectation mode in which the side role P670 is not developed to the performance position and the high role action effect P870 is displayed large in red.

In addition, in the case of transitioning to a special game (jackpot game) in a medium expectation mode or a low expectation mode, effects such as the light emitting part of the upper role P650 and the effect image displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 The effect is continuously displayed in red or the like, and when it is reported that a big win (for example, 10R probability variable) which is actually more advantageous during the big win game, the light emitting part of the superior role P650 or the effect display device P80 is displayed. It may be configured such that the effect image or the like in the area is switched to the rainbow-colored light emission and display mode displayed during the jackpot game when the 10R probability variation is notified.

<<Modification 2>>
In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, when the win-lose branch button effect occurs at the timing of the win-lose branch of the ready-to-win effect, attention is drawn to the operation of the performance accessory P560. Although it is configured to provide a special period in which the game is silent, if expectations are raised too much, there is a risk that the player's desire to play will drop markedly in the event of a failure.

Therefore, as a condition for providing such a special period, the chance-up effect occurs during the SP reach effect period, and the cut-in notice during the reach effect has a predetermined degree of expectation or more effect pattern (for example, blue < green < It is also possible to construct a pattern that generates a special period under conditions such as a case where red<gold cut-in patterns are present and more than red cut-in is executed. By doing so, the situation where the special period occurs is the situation where the SP reach is generated and the chance up effect is executed in the advance notice effect lottery, etc., and the possibility of a big hit is reduced. Limited to high conditions.

In addition, when configured in this way, the win-lose branch button effect is generated without generating a situation of silence as a special period, so that the preparatory operation of the superior object P650 (rattling operation and light emitting unit) In a state where light emission and display of upper role action effect P870) is continued, a button effective period for winning/losing branch button presentation is generated, and based on the operation of the player's presentation operation means P81, the mode of the preparatory action is set. (For example, the first effect operation pattern when winning, and the stop pattern when losing) may be switched to.

<<Modification 3>>
In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, in the "lever chance" which is the SP reach (B reach) shown in FIG. At the time of execution, the preparatory motion of the effect lever P382 of the effect operation unit P380 is configured to be executed first, but the start timing of the preparatory motion of the effect lever P382 may be changed at the same time as or after the start of the special period. good.

In addition, when configured in this way, the hit-lose branch button effect is when the operation of the effect button P381 is requested (weak pattern, the expectation of a big hit is relatively low), and when the effect lever P382 is requested to be operated (strong pattern , a relatively high expectation of a big hit), and during a special period (a special period of B reach shown in FIG. 38, a blackout display period of A reach, etc.), any effect The operating means P81 may be configured to draw attention to whether it is requested.

Further, after the shift to the special period for attracting attention to the operation of the performance accessory P560, when informing the operation content required for the performance operation means P81, when requesting the operation of the performance lever P382, the button valid By delaying the display start timing of the operation prompting image that informs that the timing of occurrence of the period will be later than when requesting the operation of the effect button P381 (for example, delaying by about 0.5 seconds), a sense of incongruity is given. The length of the special period up to the button effective period (the period for accepting the input of the performance lever) including the preparatory operation period of the performance lever is lengthened, and the length of the special period makes the player feel teased. It may be configured to increase the degree of attention to the win-lose branch button effect.

<<Modification 4>>
In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, even if an error occurs with respect to the production accessory P560 and the movable production operation is prohibited, the situation is the same as that in which the movable production operation is not prohibited. Although it is configured to control the lighting of the light-emitting part of the performance accessory P560 in the light-emitting mode, in the situation where the movable performance operation is prohibited, the light-emitting part of the performance role P560 is in a light-emitting mode different from the situation in which it is not prohibited. It may be configured to have a light emission effect pattern dedicated to error so as to light up.

In addition, even if the movable production action of the production accessory P560 is prohibited, the effect image that was scheduled to be displayed corresponding to the movable production action of the production accessory P560 such as the advance notice production and the prefetch production is also movable. By enabling the display in the same manner as in the situation where the performance action is not prohibited, the game may be configured to be playable without impairing the information related to the degree of expectation of the pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, when the movable effect action of the production accessory P560 is prohibited, instead of the action of the production accessory P560, at the timing when the movable production action of the corresponding production accessory P560 should have been executed, Corresponding to the performance accessory P560 such as the effect image by displaying the pseudo-accessory motion image of the corresponding performance accessory P560 and outputting the movable performance operation sound corresponding to the movable performance operation of the performance accessory P560 from the speaker P83. You may make it comprehensible the meaning of the image display which carries out.

(Characteristic configuration of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment)
<<Characteristic configuration 1>>
The pachinko game machine of this embodiment has the following configuration as a first characteristic configuration.

Main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, production control means (production control CPU) that controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and production controlled by the production control means A game having a device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.) and a effect movable body (effect accessory P560) included in the effect device and capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation. a machine, wherein the main control means executes a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is established based on the progress of the game, and the special game includes at least a first special game; A second special game (such as a 10R variable probability jackpot) that is more advantageous than the first special game (a 10R normal jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, a 4R normal jackpot, a small prize, etc.), and at least a first special game as a performance movable body. It has a production movable body (upper role P650) and a second production movable body (side role P670, lower role P680), and the production control means provides a specific production ( The first effect operation pattern of the upper role P650) can be executed, and the specific effect is an effect that can execute a movable effect that displaces the first effect movable body in a specific mode, and is a second special game. is scheduled to be executed, there are times when a specific performance is executed, and when a first special game is scheduled to be executed, the specific performance is not executed.

By adopting this characteristic configuration, in a gaming machine comprising a plurality of production accessories P560, a higher role (texture role), which is a specific production accessory, performs a specific action (first production action pattern, The player can easily recognize that the special game obtained when performing the "fine action" is a special game advantageous to the player, and the content of the performance can be configured simply and clearly.

<<Characteristic configuration 2>>
The pachinko game machine of this embodiment has the following configuration as a second characteristic configuration.

Main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, production control means (production control CPU) that controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and production controlled by the production control means Equipment (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), effect display means (effect display device P80) included in the effect device and performing a predetermined effect display, and effect display device P80 included in the effect device , a production movable body (production accessory P560) capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation, and a production light emitting unit (production lamp P82, light emitting unit of production accessory P560, etc.) included in the production device and executing a predetermined light emission production , wherein the main control means performs a win-or-fail lottery ( A special pattern lottery) is executed, and the performance control means can select an execution pattern from a plurality of types of performance patterns including a specific performance pattern (A reach, B reach, etc.) as an execution pattern of performance related to the result of the success or failure lottery. The specific effect pattern is to displace the effect movable body (superior object P650) to a predetermined position in front of the effect display means (superior object Execution of the first effect operation pattern of P650), and during a predetermined period (special period) immediately before the effect movable body moves toward a predetermined position, a specific display (for example, a blackout display, etc.) is performed on the effect display means, and the effect is performed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the movable body is stopped at a position other than a predetermined position, and the lighting mode of the effect lighting section is set to a special lighting mode (dimming mode or extinguishing mode).

By adopting this feature configuration, in order to notify the result of the special symbol lottery in SP reach etc. During the special period, the operation of the production display device P80, the production lamp P82, and the production role P560 (superior role P650) is set to a quiet mode (a mode of concentrating on the senior role P650), so that after the special period (production operation means After the operation of P81), the action of the performance role P560 (superior role P650) can be made to attract attention, and the performance effect of the big hit acquisition notification associated with the action of the senior role P650 can be enhanced.

<<Characteristic configuration 3>>
The pachinko game machine of this embodiment has the following configuration as the third characteristic configuration.

Main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, production control means (production control CPU) that controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and production controlled by the production control means Equipment (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), effect display means (effect display device P80) included in the effect device and performing a predetermined effect display, and effect display device P80 included in the effect device , and an effect movable body (superior role P650, side role P670, lower role P680) capable of executing a predetermined displacement action, wherein the main control means controls a predetermined movement based on the progress of the game. When the execution condition is satisfied, a win-or-fail lottery (special symbol lottery) relating to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and the effect control means executes the effect related to the result of the win-or-fail lottery. The pattern can be selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns, and the display contents displayed on the effect display means have a predetermined display priority depending on the display contents, and the effect execution pattern is a predetermined effect movable body. When an effect pattern involving a displacement motion is selected, the effect display means can display a display related to the motion of the movable object (character object motion effect), which is the display content related to the motion of the effect movable object, and can be used as the execution pattern of the effect. In a situation where an effect pattern involving a predetermined displacement motion of the effect movable body is selected, the display related to the motion of the movable body is displayed on the effect display means, and a predetermined advance notice that is display content related to whether or not the special game is executed. A game machine characterized by having a higher display priority than an effect display (announcement effect).

By adopting this configuration, in a game machine where the degree of expectation for a big hit increases when the advance notice performance and the action of the performance role P560 are combined compared to the case where they are not combined, the role action effect (higher role action effect P870 , side role action effect P871, lower role action effect P872, role full screen effect P873, etc.) is set higher than the display priority of the announcement effect executed in combination with the action of the production role P560. By setting, the performance effect of the performance role P560 is not hidden by the notice performance, etc., and the visibility for the player is improved, and the fact that the performance motion of the performance performance role P560 was performed in combination with the notice performance, etc., and the expectation of the big hit. It can be configured so that the display mode of the related role item full-screen effect, etc. can be reliably recognized.

<<Characteristic configuration 4>>
The pachinko game machine of this embodiment has the following configuration as the fourth characteristic configuration.

Main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, production control means (production control CPU) that controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and production controlled by the production control means Equipment (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), effect display means (effect display device P80) included in the effect device and performing a predetermined effect display, and effect display device P80 included in the effect device , and a plurality of effect movable bodies (higher role P650, side role P670, lower role P680) each capable of executing a predetermined displacement action, wherein the effect control means comprises a plurality of effect movable bodies. When a predetermined operation abnormality (step number over error, position check error, power supply start-up, etc.) is detected in at least one effect movable body of the body, the effect in accordance with the progress of the game of the main control means is being executed. However, it is possible to execute initial position return operation processing for returning to the initial position of each of the plurality of effect movable bodies in a predetermined processing order for each of the plurality of effect movable bodies, and to return to the initial position. During the execution of the action process, power is supplied to the drive source of the effect movable body for the return operation to the effect movable body that is currently in the processing order to perform the return operation to the initial position. and a game machine characterized in that power supply for returning operation is not performed to the drive source of the other effect movable body which is not in the current processing order.

By adopting this characteristic configuration, when an operation abnormality of the performance accessory occurs during the progress of the game (during the variable display of the special symbol), for all the performance accessories P560 that can advance to the front of the performance display device P80, It executes a process of performing a return operation toward the initial position in a predetermined order (ignoring if it is already at the initial position), and drives the performance accessory P560 that is performing the initial position return operation process. While power is supplied to the source, power is not supplied to the driving source of the production accessory P560 that is not the target of the initial position return operation process, so that the initial position return operation processing of the production accessory P560 is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of electric power required for the operation, and it is possible to prevent the operation of other production devices from being affected.

<<Characteristic configuration 5>>
The pachinko game machine of this embodiment has the following configuration as the fifth characteristic configuration.

Main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, production control means (production control CPU) that controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and production controlled by the production control means Equipment (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), effect display means (effect display device P80) included in the effect device and performing a predetermined effect display, and effect display device P80 included in the effect device , a game machine having a production movable body (lower role object P680) capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation, and a production light emitting unit provided in the production movable body and executing a predetermined light emission production, wherein the main control The means executes a win-or-fail lottery as to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is established based on the progress of the game, and the effect control means executes the win-or-fail lottery result. It is possible to select an execution pattern from a plurality of types of production patterns including a specific production pattern as the execution pattern of the production related to, and the specific production pattern is a first production period (for example, normal reach) and a second production period after the first production period. It is a production pattern having a production period (for example, SP reach), and in the first production period, by switching the light emission mode of the production light emitting unit multiple times, the first production period light emission production (back Button step-up effect) can be executed, and when the light emission effect is executed during the first effect period, until a predetermined timing during the execution of the second effect period (for example, until the winning branch effect during SP reach, or a chance until the occurrence of the up effect), the effect light emitting part is set to a light emitting mode related to the final light emitting mode of the light emitting effect during the first effect period.

By adopting this characteristic configuration, the expectation of a big hit notified by the production (back button step-up production of the light emitting part) using the production accessory P560 executed in the preceding production period is continued in the subsequent production period. By displaying , while continuously confirming the degree of expectation for a big hit reported by the performance using the performance accessory P560 in the preceding performance period, the user has a sense of expectation for the contents of the performance executed in the subsequent performance. It is possible to provide a new and highly interesting production that can be faced with

[Second embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the base technology described above. The following description focuses on the underlying technology and the differences from the present embodiment, and omits the description of the common points. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology and the present embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals.

The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment relates, as a technical field, to a game machine that executes player-operated effects that change the contents of effects that are being executed using operation means connected to the effect control board.

In the field of gaming machines, while gaming machines with various specifications are being developed, one issue is how to make the display content and display method (control method) of the player operation effect more interesting for the player. It was being explored whether it was possible to provide an operation performance.

The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment is made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a game machine equipped with highly interesting player operation effects.

The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment executes the following three effects as characteristic effects.

First of all, as a characteristic effect, it is a effect (announcement effect and reach effect) for notifying about the possibility of execution of a special game state (big hit game), and operation means P81 such as effect button P381 and cross key P383. It belongs to the button production that is developed by the operation of . The button effect, which is the first characteristic effect, is performed during an operation valid period that requires continuous operation of the first operating means (effect button P381), except for the aforementioned one operating means (effect button P381). A period for requesting the operation of other operation means (lever P382, cross key P383, etc.) is generated, and when the other operation means are effective, the player operates one operation means (effect button P381). This button effect is configured so that the content of the effect development may differ depending on whether the user operates another operation means (lever P382, cross key P383, etc.). In the second embodiment, it will be described as "battle effect A".

The second characteristic production is the production (announcement production and reach production) to notify about the possibility of execution of the special game state (jackpot game), and the operation of the operation means P81 such as the production button P381 and the cross key P383. It belongs to the button presentation developed by The button effect, which is the second characteristic effect, is a button image that prompts the operation of the effect button P381, etc. It is a notice effect that can be displayed at timing, and changes the development of the notice effect and ready-to-win effect depending on whether or not the effect button P381 or the like is operated at the timing. In the second embodiment, it will be described as "battle effect B".

The third characteristic effect is the setting of the effect mode related to the execution of the variable effect that is executed in the variable display of the special symbols in the normal game state, and the effect content (selection of playback music) in the special game state (jackpot game) ) belongs to the selection production related to. The selection effect as the third characteristic effect provides an auxiliary function when the player selects the content of the effect. Examples of auxiliary functions include a "random selection function" that randomly determines one effect content from a selectable effect content group (a plurality of effect modes, a group of reproducible music, etc.), and a predetermined one. A "recommended introduction function" that presents the contents of a presentation as a recommended presentation, etc. can be mentioned, and the details of these auxiliary functions will be described later. In the second embodiment, the explanation will be given as "effect mode selection effect".

According to the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, it is possible to provide a game machine with highly entertaining player operation effects.

(Battle production A)
First, the battle effect A, which is one of the characteristic effects in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. FIG. FIG. 41 shows a display example of the beginning of the effect in the battle effect A, and FIGS. 42 and 43 show effects selectively executed based on the player's operation mode at the timing of FIG. 41(C). . FIG. 44 shows an example of the result display screen of the battle production A (at the time of the big win) and a modification of the button operation instruction in the battle production A (timing of FIG. 41(C)).

FIG. 41 shows the process from the start of the execution of the battle effect A to the execution timing of the branch effect as described above. The execution timing of the battle effect A can be any timing, such as when it is executed as a notice effect immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbols, or when it is executed as a ready-to-win effect after the symbol tense, as shown in FIG. In the example, the example is executed as a ready-to-win effect that is executed after the decorative pattern P801 becomes a ready-to-win mode. In addition, the execution timing of the battle effect A can be appropriately set according to the importance of the effect, and is not limited to the variable effect executed in accordance with the variable display of one special symbol, It is supplemented that it can be appropriately executed as a look-ahead effect or a round effect during a big hit.

FIG. 41(A) shows the state immediately after the battle effect A is started after the decoration pattern P801 forms the ready-to-win mode in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment. The screen displays an enemy character (ENEMY) facing each other, a player side character (PLAYER), and a supporting character (MOB) as a supporting character, and a button image prompting the operation of the production button P381 in the center. P881 and an operating means valid period display P885 indicating the valid period of button operation are displayed. In FIG. 41A, "READY!" is displayed above the button image P881 on the screen, and the effective period of the button operation has not started (the operating means effective period display P885 is activated). (not valid and no period of validity is being reduced). Also, in the upper center of the screen, a message "Press the button repeatedly to defeat Mr. B!" is displayed. It indicates that the occurrence of a game, development to a further high-expectation reach performance, etc.) is determined to occur.

FIG. 41(B) shows an effect mode after the introduction effect part of the battle effect A shown in FIG. 41(A) is over and the effective period of button operation is started. An image of the three characters shown in FIG. 41(A) fighting each other is displayed in the lower left direction from the center of the screen, and a button image P881 and an operating means effective period display P885 are displayed in the lower right direction of the screen. there is Above the button image P881, an operation mode instruction image P886 is displayed with the characters "Repeated!!" to prompt the player to press the effect button P381 continuously and rapidly. In the battle effect A, the branch effect shown in FIG. 41(C) is entered before the operating means valid period display P885 shows that the valid period has passed (expired). Although not shown, an indicator that changes according to the operation of the effect button P381 may be displayed like the enemy life gauge image P891 in the battle effect B to be described later.

FIG. 41(C) shows an effect executed for switching the effect development in the battle effect A. FIG. An image of an enemy character (ENEMY) attacking and a character string "DANGER" are displayed in the lower left area of the screen. In the right side area of the screen, instead of the button image P881, a cross key image P883 (in FIG. 41(C), it suggests that the left key and right key are valid operations) and the operating means valid period A display P885 is displayed, and an operation mode instruction image P886 prompts the player to operate the cross key with characters "Use the cross key to avoid!". In FIG. 41C, the button image P881 is superimposed with a cross and displayed at the bottom right of the screen in a smaller size than the cross key image P883 so that the button image P881 is not pressed. accompanied by an instructional label prompting

The branch effect of the battle effect A (Fig. 41(C)) is a mode in which the operating means effective period display P885 of the operating means P81 in Fig. 41(B) notifies that the effective period has ended (the operating means effective period display P885 41(B), and the operation mode instruction (P886) that is executed at the timing when the effect of FIG. 41(B) is displayed. A different operation mode instruction (P886) is executed, and the player reacts skillfully at the timing when the display of FIG. 41(B) switches to the branch effect shown in FIG. It is a production to judge whether the operation can be executed. It should be noted that although the operating means effective period display P885 in FIGS. 41B and 41C is displayed in the same manner, the effective time itself is set to a different time. The effective period of operation for the operation means P81 in , is configured to be short, and is configured to increase the difficulty of executing the operation corresponding to the operation mode instruction in the branch effect.

In the branch effect shown in FIG. 41(C), when the player executes the operation instructed by the operation mode instruction image P886 on the operating means P81, the effect is developed to display the effect contents shown in FIG. , the player did not execute the operation mode instruction (P886) in the branch effect, or continued to perform the operation mode instruction (repeating operation of the effect button P381) in FIG. 41(B). In this case, the effect is switched to the effect development in which the effect contents shown in FIG. 42 are displayed. That is, in FIG. 41(C), although the effective period display (display of P881 and P885) for the effect button P381 is not performed, the effective period of the effect button P381 actually continues, and pressing the effect button P381 A decision is made to switch to display of the contents of the presentation that develops as if it were disadvantageous to the player.

It should be noted that during the period in which the effect shown in FIG. 41B is being executed, it is anticipated that no operation will be performed on the operation means P81 or a branch effect will be performed without following the instructions of the operation mode instruction image P886. If the player takes countermeasures such as slow operation, the difficulty level of the branch effect will decrease, and there is a risk that the interest and fairness of the effect will decrease. is being executed, it is determined whether or not the number of times of operation and the operation interval for the operation means P81 satisfy the conditions, and a branch effect (Fig. 41 ( C)) may be executed or not (if there is no execution of the branching effect, switching to the effect development shown in FIG. 42 is performed). In addition, by intentionally delaying the display of the operating means effective period display P885 in the branch effect, or by setting the effective period itself to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds, etc.), switching to the branch effect is performed, but the branch effect It may be configured to increase the difficulty of achieving the operation condition of the operation mode instruction image P886 in , so as to maintain the interest and fairness of the presentation.

In addition, the branch effect is configured such that the switching timing from the display of FIG. 41(C) and the operation mode instruction (P886) in the branch effect of FIG. Even if a plurality of timings for switching from FIG. 41B to FIG. 41C are provided, in FIG. During the period of FIG. 41(B), the button image P881 may not be accompanied by the operating means effective period display P885.

Furthermore, since the branch effect is configured to suddenly switch from the display before execution of the branch effect (Fig. 41(B)), immediately after the start of the branch effect, the operation mode instruction (P886) shown in Fig. 41(B) ) is likely to be executed by the player. Therefore, immediately after the start of the branch effect, with respect to the operation corresponding to the operation mode instruction (P886) shown in FIG. A "safe period (or safe condition)" is provided in which switching to the presentation development (FIG. 42) is not performed. In addition, in order to assist the reaction to the operation mode instruction in the branch effect, a little before (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the branch effect is displayed on the effect display device P80, the effect lamp P82 and the speaker P83 It is constituted so as to start a light emission performance or a sound performance corresponding to the branch performance, and even if the player looks away from the performance display device P80, he or she can be made to pay attention to the performance again and respond to the operation mode instruction (P886) in the branch performance. You may do so. Further, during the safe period, the branch effect may be executed, but the operating means effective period display P885 may not be displayed.

FIG. 42 shows an effect that develops in the branch effect shown in FIG. 41(C) when the player cannot perform an operation according to the instruction of the operation mode instruction image P886.

FIG. 42(A) shows a state in which the enemy character (ENEMY) is attacking in order to show that the enemy character (ENEMY) is superior in terms of presentation. Next, in FIG. 42(B), the player side character (PLAYER) and the support character (MOB) are shown to have fallen down and the effect has failed, and the character string "Unfortunate" and the decoration pattern P801 are displayed in the center of the screen. The middle symbol P801b (4), which is the final stop symbol, is stopped (temporarily stopped) in a manner different from the ready-to-win symbol (3).

In the case where the variation resulting from the execution of the battle performance A is a failure, or in the case of the variation performance pattern that does not develop into the performance after the battle performance A, the decorative pattern P801 is stopped and displayed in the display shown in FIG. 42(B). , the variable performance ends.

On the other hand, if the variation resulting from the execution of the battle performance A is a big hit variation, or if it is a variable performance pattern that develops into a performance after the battle performance A, the display of FIG. (resurrection effect due to the appearance of other support characters), and the subsequent development of the effect suggests the execution of a big hit game and the development of other high-expectation effects.

FIG. 43 shows an effect developed when the player performs an operation corresponding to the instruction of the operation mode instruction image P866 in the branch effect shown in FIG. 41(C).

In FIG. 43(A), a character on the player side (PLAYER) and a character string of "Successful evasion!!" A player side character (PLAYER) is shown avoiding.

FIG. 43(B) shows an effect displayed as an effect following FIG. 43(A), in which the character (PLAYER) on the player side and the character string "CHANCE" are displayed, and the battle effect A is superior to the player. (that is, there is a high degree of expectation for a big hit, or there is a high degree of expectation for development to a high-expectation-level performance after battle performance A).

In addition, in FIG. 43B, along with the button image P881, an operation mode instruction image P886 indicated by a character string of "Continue hitting!!" prompting repeated hitting operations on the effect button P381, and an operating means effective period display P885 are displayed. ing. In addition, a character string "damage increases as the charge increases" is displayed superimposed on the player's character (PLAYER). It is highly probable that the effect will be stepped up to be additionally displayed on the gold color and the character (PLAYER) on the player's side, and that the effect will be displayed step-by-step and continuously, so that the player will have an advantage over the player. It is suggested that a production suggesting is displayed. In the effect shown in FIG. 43B, the display continues until the effective period of the operating means P81 indicated by the effective period display P885 of the operating means elapses. After performing a predetermined effect display according to the progress of the effect), the process shifts to effect image development as shown in FIG. 43(C).

FIG. 43(C) is an effect image displayed after FIG. 43(B), in which an image in which the player side character (PLAYER) is attacking is displayed.

FIG. 44(A) is an effect that may be displayed subsequent to FIG. 42(C) or FIG. 43(C), and the display of the battle effect A causes an advantageous event for the player (execution of a jackpot game). , development to high-expectation performance) is displayed when it is notified that the event will occur. In the example of FIG. 44(A), the display is such that a jackpot game will be executed as a result of the battle effect A executed as a ready-to-win effect. The pattern P801b is displayed in the center of the screen, and the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c that have already been displayed show a state in which three decorative patterns P801 are displayed in the same pattern.

As described above, in the battle effect A, the branch effect, which is the button effect, is generated before the operating means effective period display P885 of the button effect being executed earlier becomes a mode informing that the effective period has ended, Different operation mode instruction images P886 are displayed for the branch performance and the previously executed button performance, and the performance display contents are displayed in an advantageous or disadvantageous manner based on the player's operation of the operation means P81 during the execution of the branch performance. By controlling the display, it is possible to provide the player with the highly interesting battle performance A as the button performance.

44(B) and 44(C) show a modification of the branch effect (FIG. 41(C)) in the battle effect A. FIG.

In the branch effect shown in FIG. 41(C), the player's operation on the operation means P81 is requested, but in the example shown in FIG. , and an operation mode instruction image P886 (an image instructing non-pressing) indicated by a character string “DO NOT PRESS!” and an image of a cross mark. That is, it is indicated that the effect develops preferentially when the player does not operate the effect button P381. As a specific example, as shown in the development shown in FIG.

In this way, the branch effect does not necessarily require an operation on the operating means P81, but may be configured to require non-operation. In addition, before the branch effect, if the operation conditions such as button operation being performed more than a predetermined number of times or operation being performed at an interval shorter than a predetermined interval are not satisfied, a variation effect pattern that requires a non-operation mode. is selected, it may be changed to a mode requiring some kind of operation on the operation means P81 instead of the variable effect pattern requiring the non-operation mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 44(B), during the period in which the operation mode instruction image P886 (image for instructing non-pressing) is displayed, which is indicated by the character string "DO NOT PRESS!" If the player has operated the production button P381, for example, the production changes to an enemy character (ENEMY) attacking as shown in FIG. 42(A). , is configured to display a development that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44(C), the operating means effective period display P885 is configured to include a special period image P889 indicating the operation invalid period or the non-pressing period, and the normal effective time display progresses. It may be configured to request different operation modes depending on the situation where the special period image P889 is progressing and the situation where the special period image P889 is progressing. In the case of such a configuration, an image of a cross may be superimposed on the button image P881 and displayed during the non-pressing period corresponding to the special period image P889.

Further, the instruction of the operation mode instruction image P886 between FIGS. 41(B) and (C) in the battle presentation A as the second embodiment described above instructs the operation of the different operation means P81. 41(B) and the branch effect (FIG. 41(C)) are configured to prompt the user to operate the operation means P81 (for example, effect button P381) common to the branch effect (FIG. 41(C)). , the operation means P81 (effect button P381) may be configured to have different operation modes (for example, a configuration in which "repeated hits" and "long press" are instructed as the operation modes).

It should be noted that the above-described "automatic repeated hitting" operation may be enabled during the execution of the effect for prompting the continuous hitting operation on the effect button P381 in the battle effect A described above. In other words, it may be configured such that, when executing the effect for prompting the continuous hitting operation on the effect button P381, by executing the “long press” operation, it is assumed that the “continuous hitting” operation has been executed, and the repeated processing is executed. good.

(Battle production B)
Next, the battle effect B in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48. FIG. Each of FIGS. 45 to 48 is an example of a screen displayed while the battle effect B is in progress. It may be configured such that the battle effect B progresses by combining the effect examples shown in the above drawings. In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, a plurality of effects shown in FIGS. 45 to 48 are displayed in order according to the variable effect pattern determined by the effect determination process. As for the display order, the same effect may be repeatedly executed, or multiple display timings may be set in one variable effect pattern.

In the battle production B, for example, as shown in FIG. 45, the player side character (PLAYER) and the enemy character (ENEMY) are fighting with each other. When the button is operated, the meter display, which is an image indicating the progress of production (enemy life gauge P891) at the top of the screen, decreases, and the enemy life gauge P891 reaches the target amount (the meter is completely exhausted, the remaining amount is the standard value) is reached, the variable display of the special symbols in which the battle performance B is executed suggests that the execution of the big win game and the performance of the battle performance B and later will develop into a performance with a high degree of expectation. It is a production that informs that a development that is advantageous to

In each example of the battle effect B shown in FIGS. 45 to 48, two decorative patterns P801 are displayed with the same four patterns, showing a mode in which the battle effect B is executed as part of the ready-to-win effect. It should be noted that the meter display, which is another production progress suggesting image (player side life gauge P892) displayed at the bottom left of the figure, may decrease as the enemy character (ENEMY) attacks. When it becomes a specific display mode (the meter runs out completely, the remaining amount falls below the reference value), in the variable display of the special pattern in which the battle production B is executed, it is notified that it will be lost, or it is said to be lost. The effect display is performed in such a manner that the effect is developed disadvantageously as if there is an increasing possibility of becoming.

《Production example 1 of battle production B》
FIG. 45 is one of the display examples of the battle production B, and shows a mode in which the player side character (PLAYER) is attacking the enemy character (ENEMY). In the button effect in the state where this display is executed, an effect is executed in which the enemy life gauge P891 is decreased by performing an operation according to the instruction of the operation mode instruction image P886.

In the example of FIG. 45, as the instruction of the operation mode instruction image P886, the character string "Press the PUSH button when the target is marked!" When the player operates the effect button P381, which is the operation means P81 indicated by the mark, it is suggested that the enemy life gauge P891 is reduced.

In FIG. 45, four button images P881 are displayed, showing a mode of moving while gradually expanding in the moving direction P896. Each button image P881 is designed such that the target image P890 and the button image P881 have approximately the same size at the timing of reaching the position of the target image P890. Therefore, the button image P881 corresponding to the next operation is displayed in the largest size, so that the player can easily pay attention to the button image P881 corresponding to the operation, even if a plurality of button images P881 are displayed. , the movement of the button image P881 and the enlarged display of the button image P881, the player can easily determine the timing to operate the button image P881. If the button image P881 is operated at a timing when the button image P881 is not positioned within the target image P890, the attack of the player side character (PLAYER) will fail and the enemy life gauge P891 will not decrease. is configured to have a predetermined allowable range. Although not shown, if the button image P881 is operated at the timing when it is positioned within the target image P890, a success effect (for example, an effect displaying "GOOD!!") is executed, and the button image P881 is executed. is not positioned within the target image P890, a failure effect (for example, an effect displaying "BAD...") is executed.

The button image P881 is displayed in the largest size at the timing (or immediately before) when it reaches the center position of the target image P890. maintained. Then, when the relative position of the button image P881 to the target image P890 is targeted for the failure effect, the button image P881 is reduced and displayed moving away from the center position of the target image P890, and the effect button P381 is displayed. The button image P881 is deleted at the timing (or before or after) when it is removed from the operation target.

As illustrated, a plurality of button images P881 can be displayed at the same time. If the button image P881 moves beyond the target image P890 without performing the operation, the corresponding one button image P881 (in this example, the button image P881 before being targeted for the failure effect, which is the center of the target image P890). The button image P881) close to the position is erased, and a new button image P881 can be additionally displayed during the performance. Also, the mode of the success effect may be varied depending on the degree of overlap between the target image P890 and the button image P881 at the timing when the player operates the effect button P381. For example, if the timing is appropriate when the centers of the target image P890 and the button image P881 match, "EXCELLENT!!" An example is given in which "GOOD!!" is displayed as a success effect if the timing is appropriate within the allowable range. 46 to 48, which will be described later, the deletion and display start of the button image P881 are appropriately performed in the same manner according to the content of the effect.

《Production example 2 of battle production B》
46 shows an example of an effect image displayed at the attack timing of the enemy character (ENEMY) in the battle effect B. FIG. In the battle effect B in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the player side life gauge P892 is displayed as another effect progress indication image, and in the effect display example shown in FIG. By preventing an attack based on the operation of the operating means P81, the player's character (PLAYER) performs defense/avoidance action, and the effect display is executed such that the player's life gauge P892 does not decrease. there is

In the example shown in FIG. 46, as the operation mode instruction image P886, the words "Continuous hit" and "Destroy the enemy button before it reaches the target!!" are displayed, and the button image P881 is also displayed. This indicates that the player must perform multiple input operations on the effect button P381.

Also, in FIG. 46, an enemy character button image P893 (an object image suggesting the timing at which the enemy character's attack is established) is displayed, and the target image P890 approaches while moving along the moving direction P896. is configured as Before the enemy character button image P893 overlaps the target image P890, an effect display is performed in a mode in which a predetermined operation condition of the effect button P381 must be satisfied. Even during the period in which the enemy character button image P893 is displayed, the effective period of the effect button P381 may be suggested by displaying the operating means effective period display P885. In such a configuration, the operating means validity period display P885 may be displayed fixedly in a predetermined display area, or may be displayed so as to move along with the movement of the enemy character button image P893. .

In the production example of FIG. 46, the effect generated by the player's operation of the production button P381 is generated from the button image P881 toward the enemy character button image P893, and the enemy character button image P893 is about to be destroyed. is displayed. Although not shown, the enemy character button image P893 gradually blinks in red as the operation condition is nearing completion, and when the operation condition is achieved, it explodes and disappears. indicates that the attack of the enemy character (ENEMY) has failed.

In the battle production B, the player may lose the battle by decreasing the life gauge P892 on the player side (the special symbol fluctuation display may be "missed", resulting in an unfavorable development). In order to give the player a sense of tension, the enemy character (ENEMY) may attack without displaying the enemy character button image P893. An enemy character button image P893 with such an achievement condition (destruction condition) may be displayed.

《Production example 3 of battle production B》
47 shows another display example of the battle effect B. FIG. In the effect display example of FIG. 47, a support character (MOB) is displayed in addition to the player side character (PLAYER), and an effect is executed in which two people attack the enemy character (ENEMY). It indicates that

The instruction of the operation mode instruction image P886 in FIG. 47 instructs to operate the operation means P81 when the target is marked, similarly to the instruction in FIG. The difference is that the player is requested to operate the left key of the cross key P383. In the battle production B in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the operation of the production button P381 causes an attack by the player side character (PLAYER), and the operation of the cross key P383 causes an attack by the support character (MOB). It is

In the upper right direction of the screen, a circular target image P890 for suggesting the operation timing of the production button P381 and a square target image P890 for suggesting the operation timing of the left key of the cross key P383 are displayed. A button image P881 and a cross key image P883 are shown moving (moving direction P896) toward each target image P890.

In addition, in the area to the right of the plurality of button images P881 and the cross key image P883, a character string "Continue hitting" as an operation mode instruction image P886, a plurality of button images P881 and the cross key image P883 are displayed in a rectangular area. A superimposed special operation period image P897 is displayed. This special operation period image P897 determines whether or not the internal button image 881 (cross key image P883) overlaps the target image P890 during the period in which the special operation period image P897 partially overlaps each target image P890. A display indicating that it is an effect period during which an attack is performed by the player side character (PLAYER) based on the player's operation of the effect button P381 (cross key P383) and the enemy life gauge P891 is decreased. is.

In the above description, the player character (PLAYER) and the support character (MOB) are attacked. Enemy character button image P893, and operation mode instruction image P886 and button image for achieving destruction condition of enemy character button image P893 (encourages operation of operation means different from attack operation means such as player character) An image is preferable) or the like may be displayed. Further, the example of displaying the enemy character button image P893 during the display of the effect mainly involving the attack of the player side character may be implemented in other examples shown in FIGS. 45 and 48 as well.

《Production example 4 of battle production B》
FIG. 48 shows one example of the display in battle production B, showing a state in which a player side character (PLAYER), a support character (MOB), and an enemy character (ENEMY) are fighting each other.

In the example of effect shown in FIG. 48, unlike the other examples of effect shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, a target image P890 is moved and displayed with respect to a button image P881 or the like that instructs the player to operate the operation means P81. The difference is that it is executed in Therefore, the operation mode instruction image P886 is expressed as "Press the button when the target overlaps the mark!".

In the example of FIG. 48, the button images P881 are spirally arranged around each character, and the earlier the operation order, the larger the button image P881 is displayed. In the example of FIG. 48, the target image P890 is displayed moving in a counterclockwise spiral locus, and the player is requested to operate the effect button P381 at a position overlapping each button image P881. there is As in the example of FIG. 45, each button image P881 is gradually enlarged and displayed on the spot so that the target image P890 becomes approximately the same size as the target image P890 at the timing when the target image P890 overlaps the button image P881. As a player, it is possible to identify which button image is the button image P881 corresponding to the next operation. Timing can be measured.

According to the battle effect B that is executed as described above with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48, effect suggestions such as button images are made in accordance with the display of display objects such as characters in dynamically displayed effect animation images. To provide a highly interesting button performance for performing a performance display highly related to requests for various operation modes and the development of the performance display, such as displaying an image and operating at the same timing.

Further, in the battle effect B of the second embodiment, at least one of the target image P890 and the button image P881 suggesting the timing of the button operation is dynamically changed so that the position relative to the other is changed. , and by gradually increasing the size of the button image P881, it is possible to measure the operation timing by changing the relative size relationship between the target image P890 and the button image. Even if the target image P890, the button image P881, and the like are displayed in various places, it is possible to appropriately notify the timing of prompting the player to operate and the order of the target button image P881.

In the second embodiment, the target image P890, the button image P881, etc., one of which is dynamically displayed, is configured so as to change the two conditions of the relative positional relationship and the relative size. , the same number of target images P890 and button images P881 are displayed with substantially the same coordinates as the central position, and the button image P881 is enlarged and the target image P890 is reduced (or the button image P881 is enlarged and the target image P890 is displayed). The operation timing may be suggested based on the relationship between the sizes of the two (by one display of the reduced display).

In addition, the battle effect B in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment is not limited to the type of effect in which the display mode of the effect is "battle", as long as it has the same control as the button effect, and it is appropriately applied and executed. It is possible. Moreover, it may have the following modification examples of production and control.

The enemy character button image P893 shown in the example of FIG. 46 is a button image that is approximately the same as the button image of the button effect used when the player side character (PLAYER) performs an attack action or the like. In order to avoid this, it is preferable to change the color scheme, etc., or add additional displays). It may be configured to show Also, depending on whether or not the destruction of the enemy character button image P893 is achieved, it is determined whether the character to attack next is the player side character (PLAYER) or the enemy character (ENEMY). It may be configured such that an effect development display is made by combining a button operation and an effect display corresponding to the operation.

In addition, as shown in the example of FIG. 47, when requesting an operation for two operation means (two or more operation means may be used), two or more types of button images P881, cross key images P883, etc. are displayed simultaneously as target images. It may be configured so that P890 is reached, and if a simultaneous operation is not executed, it is not regarded as a valid input, and a failure mode effect is performed.

As another modified example, information such as the number of times the effect button P381 can be operated continuously as instructed by the operation mode instruction image P886 is counted (referred to as the number of combos), and as the number of combos increases, Using the value of the number of times of combo as feedback information, a lottery such as replacement of the content of the effect is performed during the execution of the effect, and the number of appearances of the operation instruction images of the operating means P81 such as the effect button image P881 is increased, and the enemy life gauge P891 is decreased. Effect development may be performed so as to increase the possibility of suggesting an advantageous result to the player by performing effect control that executes content change control in real time, such as increasing the amount of play.

In addition, in the battle effect B in the second embodiment described above, by displaying the player side life gauge P892 on the lower left of the screen, the possibility of displaying a disadvantageous effect for the player and the indication of the timing are displayed. However, the role of the meter display at the bottom left of the screen is changed, for example, based on the effective operation of the button operation that is advantageous to the player (operation that causes the player's character (PLAYER) to attack) The meter display (P892) is increased, and when the meter reaches a specific display (filling up, exceeding a reference value), the character on the player side (PLAYER) unleashes a special move, and the result of the battle production B is displayed. may be configured to display

Also, the amount by which the player side life gauge P892 or the enemy life gauge P891 is increased or decreased may differ depending on the timing of the button operation. As a specific example, if you press the button at the most appropriate timing (for example, when the target is covered with all the marks), "EXCELLENT!!" will be displayed and the enemy's life gauge will appear. P891 is reduced by half, and if the button is pressed at the second most appropriate timing (for example, when the mark partially overlaps the target), "GOOD!" will be displayed. Enemy life gauge P891 is reduced by 1/4, and if the button is pressed at inappropriate timing (for example, when the target is not marked), "BAD..." will be displayed. It may be configured not to reduce the enemy life gauge P891.

As another modification, an enemy character drops an item based on a button operation (an operation that causes an attack by a player's character (PLAYER)) that is advantageous to the player during execution of the battle production B. , the dropped item (drop item) may be made available in the subsequent production. As an example of using the drop item, the variable display of the special symbols being executed in the battle performance B and the variation display of the special symbols to be executed later are used to notify the expectation of the execution of the big hit game, which is used for chance up notification. Alternatively, it is conceivable to add a customizing function such as changing the determination tendency of the variable presentation to the player's preference and adding a song that can be selected as a song to be played back as BGM.

44 to 48 described in the second embodiment, an example of rendering in which two-dimensional animation data is displayed is illustrated, but a rendering display method in which images of 3D data are drawn in real time is adopted. If it is a game machine that does, it is possible to add changes to the contents of the performance by more detailed control. For example, when a 3D moving image is output in which a player character (PLAYER) punches an enemy character (ENEMY), the button image P881 is superimposed on the limbs of the player character (PLAYER) for a short period of time. (0.5 seconds), and depending on whether or not the effect button P381 is operated during the same period, it is determined whether or not to superimpose the injured texture on the enemy character (ENEMY). can also be adopted.

In the case of effect display based on such 3D data, instead of measuring the timing using the target image P890 and the button image P881 as in the second embodiment, the player side character (PLAYER) drawn in real time is used. ) may be changed by the player's operation (e.g., an enemy character (ENEMY) may be additionally displayed with an injury effect). , a cross key image P883 and a button image P881 are displayed corresponding to the right arm and the left arm, respectively. Switches whether to display either the right arm or the left arm (or alternately controls so that you can attack more efficiently, such as by increasing the number of attacks than if you operate only one in succession), etc. You may perform the display which attaches the change of the attack pattern of .

(Production mode selection production)
Next, referring to FIGS. 49 to 51, the effect contents (selection of effect mode, BGM music, content of developing notice effect, other customizations, etc.) to be executed in the pachinko game machine in the second embodiment can be selected by the player. A description will be given of the characteristic contents of the arbitrarily selectable effects. In the second embodiment, the effect of selecting the effect mode in the specific game state after the big win game, which is often carried out in a specific round during the big win game or during the jackpot end demonstration effect period, is the "effect mode selection effect". ” will be described as a main example. Regarding the display contents shown in the drawings, the explanation of the display contents which are the same as those of the pachinko game machine, which is assumed, will be omitted unless necessary.

In the display example shown in FIG. 49, at the timing when the 10th unit game (10th round game) in the jackpot game is executed, an example of displaying an effect to select the effect mode in the specific game state is shown. there is In the example of FIG. 49, from the approximate center of the screen to the left side of the screen, a selection target object image P856 (the image displayed in the production mode A to the production mode D) developed in a fan shape, and a frame-shaped frame indicating the current selection target. A selection cursor P857 is displayed, indicating that the effect mode B can be selected (decision operation is possible) as the effect mode in the specific game state.

In the display of FIG. 49, the selection target object P856 for the production mode D is displayed in gray, and has a different display mode from the selection target objects P856 for the other production modes A to C. The selection target object P856 displayed in gray in this manner is an effect unreleased object, and indicates that it is in an effect mode (effect content) in a state in which it is impossible to select it by a selection operation to be described later. Unreleased selection target objects P856 such as the production mode D are specified as the number of consecutive games in which the big hit game and the specific game state are repeatedly performed, the number of times of variable display of the special symbol variable display in the normal game state, and the variable performance. It is configured to be in an open state due to various factors such as winning the variation effect of the pattern of , and switch to display with a white background as a selectable object P856 by a selection operation.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 49, for the effect mode B selected by the selection cursor P857, the effect summary of the corresponding effect is displayed as "mode explanation", and reference information for the player to select the effect content. is presented. Although not shown, the rendering modes as selection target objects are not limited to rendering modes A to D, and other rendering modes may be selectable. In the example of FIG. Among them, four are displayed as the upper limit, and depending on the type of the selection target object P856 displayed on the selection cursor P857, the types of the selection target object P856 displayed above and below are changed while being circularly shifted. It is configured as follows.

Subsequently, a description will be given of a display example based on selection operation and operation of the effect content (effect mode) of the effect mode selection effect shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 .

First, in FIG. 49, a cross key image P883 and a button image P881 are displayed in a selection method explanation image display area P858 as a display relating to selection operation of the effect content. Here, the button image P881 is followed by a character string "determine by", and based on the operation of the effect button P381, the current selection target object P856 indicated by the selection cursor P857 is selected by the player. It is shown to be determined as

In the cross key image P883, a display of "change mode" is displayed in the up and down direction of the up key and the down key. is changed to an upper object (in the example in the figure, production mode C) or a lower object (in the example in the figure, production mode A). In the operation to change the selected effect mode, the corresponding object is moved and displayed to the position of the selection cursor P857, and the other selection target objects follow and are shifted and displayed in the same direction.

In FIG. 49, if the up key of the cross key P383 is operated in a situation where the selection cursor P857 is positioned in the effect mode C, the effect unreleased object such as the selection target object P856 related to the effect mode D will be displayed. When an operation is performed to align the selection cursor P857, the selection cursor P857 is positioned at the selection target object P856 related to the effect mode D, but the operation of the effect button does not determine it, and a voice is output to the effect that the selection cannot be made. Alternatively, the selection target object P856 relating to the production mode D may be skipped, and the selection cursor P857 may be positioned on the selection target object P856 (for example, the selection target object P856 relating to the presentation mode E) above it. may

A character string "random" and a character string "recommended" are displayed beside the left key and right key images of the cross key image P883. That is, during execution of the effect mode selection effect (during the image display of FIG. 49), if the left key is operated, it is possible to select the effect contents (effect mode) by the "random selection function", and if the right key is operated, the "recommended mode" can be selected. It is shown that it is possible to select the contents of the production (production mode) by the production selection function. The "random selection function" and the "recommended effect selection function" will be described in detail later.

Below the selection method explanation image display area P858, the remaining time display P859 (select the mode, _ remaining XX seconds) is displayed. It is announcing that it is XX seconds. At the timing when the remaining time display is "0 seconds", the operation is the same as when the effect button P381 is operated at that timing. For example, when the remaining time display is "0 seconds" in the example of FIG. 49, the effect mode B selected by the selection cursor P857 is selected as the effect mode in the specific game state. In addition, it is not limited to this, and when the remaining time display becomes "0 seconds" in the example of FIG. It may be configured, or may be configured so that the effect mode determined last time is determined.

In the situation where the display shown in FIG. 49 is performed, when the operation for determining the content of the effect is performed, the display in which the effect mode of the selection target object P856 selected by the selection cursor P857 is determined is displayed as the selection target. This is done by enlarging the object P856 (for example, displaying it on the full screen). It should be noted that the selection target object P856 is displayed in an enlarged manner when an operation to determine the content of the effect is performed, while the selection target object P856 is not enlarged and displayed when the above-described remaining time display is "0 seconds". may

《Random selection function》
FIG. 50 is a process of randomly determining 1 effect content as the selected effect content based on a random number or the like obtained at the timing of button operation for the effect content (effect mode) of the selectable selection target object P856. It is an example of a display which shows the execution aspect of the function which performs.

The screen display of FIG. 50 indicates whether or not to display a pop-up window P860 in the substantially central area of the screen by operating the left key of the cross key P383 during the screen display of FIG. is displayed for the player to select.

In the pop-up window P860 in the random selection function of FIG. 50, the character string "random" in the upper left notifies that the "random selection function" is being executed, and on the left side of the screen is a selectable object P856 that can be selected as an object to be selected. A mode is shown in which the icon (character image used in the effect mode) indicating the content of the effect is switched at high speed.

The pop-up window is superimposed on most of the selection method explanation image display area P858 in FIG. 49, and a new selection method explanation image display area P858 is displayed inside the pop-up window (lower part of the screen). . In the random selection function, by operating the performance button P381 while the pop-up window is displayed, the content of performance (performance mode) determined by lottery is displayed in the pop-up window as the selected performance mode. Further, after the pop-up window of the random selection function is displayed, if the content of the effect is undecided, the player operates the right key of the cross key P383 to cancel the random selection function (close the pop-up window). ) is configured to be controlled.

As shown in FIG. 50, the pop-up window of the random selection function is displayed at a position that does not cover the display of the remaining time display P859 so that the player can recognize the remaining time of the effect mode selection effect. If the pop-up window display is configured to be displayed in a larger size than the example shown in FIG. 50, the remaining time display can be moved to the inside of the pop-up window, or the pop-up window can be displayed from the position shown in FIG. may be controlled to move to a position where they do not overlap (control may be performed so that the player can recognize the remaining time). When the remaining time display becomes "0 seconds" while the pop-up window of the random selection function is being displayed, it is treated as having operated the effect button P381 during the random selection function.

When the random selection function shown in FIG. 50 is used to determine the effect content, the selected effect content is displayed by enlarging the pop-up window displayed by the random selection function (for example, full-screen display). notify. In addition, the notification effect by the enlarged display of the effect determined by the random selection function is displayed in the same display mode as the notification mode when the effect content is determined based on the normal selection operation of the effect mode selection effect shown in FIG. It is configured. As a modified example, it is emitted at the time of determination when the operation for determining the content of the effect is performed in the screen state of FIG. The character lines may be different, or the action patterns of the character images may be different. Even if the same performance is selected, it is possible to provide various performances by differentiating the determined performances and to increase the interest.

It should be noted that, as in the production mode D of FIG. Alternatively, the lottery process may be performed using a table having different numbers and types of selectable effects modes. Since the lottery table becomes more complicated as the number of variations increases, the lottery process determines the offset number (the total number of types of selection object P856 including unreleased production contents is N, and the upper limit is N, N-1, 2N, 2N-1). Random value selected from the range) is determined, and before opening the pop-up window of the random selection function, the effect selected as the selection target object P856 at the position of the selection cursor P857 is moved upward (or downward) ) may be configured to select the same presentation mode as in the case where the operation is performed for the number of times of offset. With this configuration, even in a situation where unreleased performance contents that are non-selection targets exist, the selection target object P856 is skipped and the next selection target object P856 is selected in the same manner as a normal selection operation. Since it is only necessary to perform the same processing as the processing of positioning the cursor P857, etc., the lottery processing of the random selection function and the determination processing of the content of the selected effect can be configured to be simple processing.

《Recommended effect selection function》
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the "recommended effect selection function" will be described. The "recommended effect selection function" presents to the player the effect contents selected at random or based on a predetermined selection criterion from among the effect contents that are currently selectable, together with explanatory text (mode explanation). It is a production that makes you choose whether to select or not. When the content of the presentation to be displayed is selected at random, it can be said that whether or not the content of presentation to be selected before the operation of the presentation button P381 is known is different from the above-described random selection function.

On the other hand, the contents of the displayed effect may be displayed according to a predetermined selection criterion (selection method). For example, the following selection criteria (selection method) can be considered.
(1) A circuit component such as an RTC (real-time clock) is used to measure the date and time so that the contents of the presentation displayed using date information and time information can be sequentially switched.
(2) It is possible to set the effect content displayed as the recommended effect content from the menu displayed by the operation procedure that can be executed only by the manager of the amusement arcade (for example, opening the glass frame and operating the effect button P381). configured to (Multiple settings may be made possible, and may be configured to be displayed in order for each jackpot game.)
(3) High relevance to the variable production pattern determined by the production determination process in the special symbol fluctuation display (jackpot fluctuation) that started the big hit game (production mode selection production) (for example, active characters etc. ) configured to display the presentation mode.
(4) The production mode is set so as to be a series of production modes with the variation production pattern determined by the production determination process in the fluctuation display (jackpot fluctuation) of the special symbol that will start the big hit game (production mode selection production). Configure to display.

A screen display example of the "recommended effect selection function" is similar to the random selection function shown in FIG. , the character string of "production mode X", which is the current selection candidate (recommended production content), the icon display corresponding to production mode X, and the mode explanation of production mode X are displayed, and the selection method explanation image display area P858 is displayed. displayed at the bottom of the screen.

In recent game machines, there are cases where a large number of presentation contents can be selected. It is conceivable that a player who does not have a good understanding of the contents of the selectable effects may hesitate in selecting the contents of the effects. Therefore, as in the "recommended effect selection function" in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, if it is configured to be able to receive an explanation regarding the content of the effect for the first effect mode, the user can understand the content and perform the effect. can assist in making the selection of As shown in FIG. 49, the display area of the selection target object P856 is configured to accompany the display related to the mode explanation. This is very difficult, and there is a risk that only the effect selected by the current selection cursor P857 will be selected, omitting the trouble of checking each time. As for such a problem, by displaying the contents of 1 effect as a "recommended effect selection function" by a simple operation, it is possible to understand the contents as if trying out a new effect. This can be executed, and the effect that the player can deepen his/her understanding of the performance of the pachinko game machine and enjoy the performance more can be expected.

As described above, in the "effect mode selection effect" in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the normal selection operation (the relative position of the selection cursor P857 and the selection target object P856 by the up key and down key of the cross key P383 In addition to the operation of switching and selecting, a "random selection function" and a "recommended effect selection function" are configured to be executable as functions for simply assisting the player's selection operation. According to such a configuration, the number of selectable presentation contents increases, and even if the player hesitates about the selection operation or becomes troublesome, a simple operation can be performed to create a presentation that has never been seen before. It is possible to create an opportunity to see a new production by making the mode selectable.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, a "random selection function" and a "recommended effect selection function" are executed as auxiliary selection functions in the selection effect of selecting one effect content from a plurality of effect contents. However, it may be configured to be executable by assigning other auxiliary selection functions as described below to the control based on the operation of the operation means P81.

《Examples of other auxiliary selection functions》
(1) Most selected effect since the pachinko game machine was installed (most popular effect selection).
(2) The most selected rendition within the last two weeks (recent trend selection).
(3) The most selected performance during the period when the cooperation function using the password, etc. issued from the server managed by the pachinko machine manufacturer, the terminal information owned by the player, the registration information, etc. is in operation. (Personal favorite production selection).
(4) Select the effect selected last time (*Only when adopting control where the relative position of the selection cursor P857 and the selection target object P856 becomes the position for selecting the new effect when a new effect is released) .
It should be noted that functions such as (1) and (2) do not become selectable until the condition is satisfied, such as the effect mode D in FIG. A difference may be provided in the addition method between effects that are always selectable, such as counting by multiplying by a coefficient.

The selection effect explained in the second embodiment and the modified example is not limited to the effect mode selection effect during the big hit, but also as control during display of the menu screen effect executed based on the operation of the operation means P81 during non-game. can also be applied, and may be applied to the effect displayed during the execution of the variable effect accompanying the variable display of the special symbol. In addition to the production mode, the production contents include the selection of images such as the background of some production areas, the selection of BGM to be played, and the selection of production customization contents that change the tendency of production execution and production determination. is also applicable.

As described above, the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment has three special effects using the operating means P81: "battle effect A", "battle effect B", and "effect mode selection effect". Although the two effects have been described, if the same button effect control is provided, the effect mode may be a battle effect in which the player side character (PLAYER) and the enemy character (ENEMY) fight, or a specific effect during the big win game. It can also be applied to an effect other than the effect mode of selecting an effect mode in the game state.

In addition, as a player operation presentation using the operation means P81 in a game machine other than a pachinko game machine, such as a reel-type game machine (slot machine), a ball game machine, a casino machine, etc., in the second embodiment. Effect control of the characteristic player operation effect described above may be applied.

P pachinko machine, P1 outer frame, P2 front frame, P3 glass frame,
P4 back set unit, P5 game board, P40 main control board,
P41 effect control board, P42 image control board, P43 payout control board,
P44 Power supply board, P47 Power switch, P48 Ram clear switch,
P49 setting key switch, P50 main control display device,
P51 first special symbol display device, P52 second special symbol display device,
P80 effect display device, P81 effect operation means (P380 effect operation unit,
P381 production button, P382 lever, P383 cross key),
P82 production lamp (P350 frame lamp, P550 board lamp),
P83 speaker (P141 curtain board speaker, P371 upper speaker),
P560 production accessory, P710 first start winning device,
P720 second start winning device, P730 general winning device,
P740 Normal figure operation gate device, P750 Grand winning entrance device P755 Special electric accessory, P770 Normal electric accessory

Claims (1)

a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
Production control means for controlling the execution of production in accordance with the progress of the game of the main control means;
A production device controlled by the production control means;
an effect display means included in the effect device for performing a predetermined effect display;
a production movable body included in the production device and capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation;
an effect light-emitting unit provided in the effect movable body and executing a predetermined light-emission effect;
A gaming machine having
The main control means executes a win-or-fail lottery regarding whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied based on the progress of the game,
The production control means is
It is possible to select an execution pattern from a plurality of types of production patterns including a specific production pattern as an execution pattern of production related to the result of the lottery,
The specific effect pattern is a effect pattern having a first effect period and a second effect period after the first effect period,
In the first effect period, by switching the light emission mode of the effect light emitting unit a plurality of times, it is possible to execute a first effect period light emission effect that suggests a result of the winning lottery,
The suggestion related to the result of the lottery in the first effect period light effect is suggested step by step by the difference in color in the light emission mode of the effect light emitting unit,
When the first effect period light emission effect is executed, the effect light emitting unit emits light related to the final light emission mode of the first effect period light effect until a predetermined timing during the execution of the second effect period. as a mode,
The second effect period is a ready-to-win effect suggesting that the special game is executed when a predetermined effect result is obtained, and during the ready-to-win effect suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. It is possible to execute multiple notice effects during reach,
The final light emission mode of the light emission effect during the first effect period continues until the predetermined timing of the advance notice effect during reach of the plurality of advance notice effects during reach ,
Before the timing of the predetermined ready-to-reach advance notice effect in the second effect period, the effect light emitting unit emits a light in a color different from the final light effect in the first effect period, The degree of expectation that the result of the win-or-fail lottery results in the execution of the special game is higher for the light emission mode of the first presentation period light emission presentation than the final light emission mode of the first presentation period light presentation. When the specific notice of emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode that is the suggested color is executed, the final effect of the first effect period light emission effect in the effect light emitting unit is performed before the predetermined timing of the advance notice effect during reach. When the light emission mode is switched from the light emission mode to the predetermined light emission mode, and the final light emission mode of the first effect period light emission effect is not restored even after the end of the specific notice, and the specific notice is not executed, the second The game machine is capable of executing light emission in the final light emission mode of the first effect period light emission effect until the timing of the predetermined ready-to-win advance notice effect in the effect period .

Images